You are on page 1of 432

MagellanTM 2200VS and 2300HS

Enhanced

Product Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Datalogic Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, Oregon 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be repro-
duced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates
("Datalogic" or “Datalogic Scanning”). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and
transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices,
including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic
versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.scanning.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit
our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Dat-
alogic" page.
Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the
right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other
brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Magellan is a registered trademark of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and All-Weighs, FirstStrike and Surround-
Scan are registered trademarks of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. in the U.S.A. OmegaTek, Produce Rail, Productivity Index Reporting and SmartSen-
try are all trademarks of Datalogic Scanning, Inc.

This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents: 4603262 • 4639606 • 4652750 • 4672215 • 4699447 • 4709369 • 4749879
• 4786798 • 4792666 • 4794240 • 4798943 • 4799164 • 4820911 • 4845349 • 4861972 • 4861973 • 4866257 • 4868836 • 4879456 • 4939355 •
4939356 • 4943127 • 4963719 • 4971176 • 4971177 • 4991692 • 5001406 • 5015831 • 5019697 • 5019698 • 5086879 • 5115120 • 5144118 •
5146463 • 5179270 • 5198649 • 5200597 • 5202784 • 5208449 • 5210397 • 5212371 • 5212372 • 5214270 • 5229590 • 5231293 • 5232185 •
5233169 • 5235168 • 5237161 • 5237162 • 5239165 • 5247161 • 5256864 • 5258604 • 5258699 • 5260554 • 5274219 • 5296689 • 5298728 •
5311000 • 5327451 • 5329103 • 5330370 • 5347113 • 5347121 • 5371361 • 5382783 • 5386105 • 5389917 • 5410108 • 5420410 • 5422472 •
5426507 • 5438187 • 5440110 • 5440111 • 5446271 • 5446749 • 5448050 • 5463211 • 5475206 • 5475207 • 5479011 • 5481098 • 5491328 •
5493108 • 5504350 • 5508505 • 5512740 • 5541397 • 5552593 • 5557095 • 5563402 • 5565668 • 5576531 • 5581707 • 5594231 • 5594441 •
5598070 • 5602376 • 5608201 • 5608399 • 5612529 • 5629510 • 5635699 • 5641958 • 5646391 • 5661435 • 5664231 • 5666045 • 5671374 •
5675138 • 5682028 • 5686716 • 5696370 • 5703347 • 5705802 • 5714750 • 5717194 • 5723852 • 5750976 • 5767502 • 5770847 • 5786581 •
5786585 • 5787103 • 5789732 • 5796222 • 5804809 • 5814803 • 5814804 • 5821721 • 5822343 • 5825009 • 5834708 • 5834750 • 5837983 •
5837988 • 5852286 • 5864129 • 5869827 • 5874722 • 5883370 • 5905249 • 5907147 • 5923023 • 5925868 • 5929421 • 5945670 • 5959284 •
5962838 • 5979769 • 6000619 • 6006991 • 6012639 • 6016135 • 6024284 • 6041374 • 6042012 • 6045044 • 6047889 • 6047894 • 6056198 •
6065676 • 6069696 • 6073849 • 6073851 • 6094288 • 6112993 • 6129279 • 6129282 • 6134039 • 6142376 • 6152368 • 6152372 • 6155488 •
6166375 • 6169614 • 6173894 • 6176429 • 6188500 • 6189784 • 6213397 • 6223986 • 6230975 • 6230976 • 6244510 • 6259545 • 6260763 •
6266175 • 6273336 • 6276605 • 6279829 • 6290134 • 6290135 • 6293467 • 6303927 • 6311895 • 6318634 • 6328216 • 6332576 • 6332577 •
6343741 • 6454168 • 6478224 • 6568598 • 6578765 • 6705527 • 6857567 • 6974084 • 6991169 • 7051940 • 7170414 • 7172123 • 7201322 •
7204422 • 7215493 • 7224540 • 7234641 • 7243850 • 7374092 • 7407096 • 7490770 • 7495564 • 7506816 • 7527198 • 7527207 • 7537166 •
7562817 • 601 26 118.6 • AU703547 • D312631 • D313590 • D320011 • D320012 • D323492 • D330707 • D330708 • D349109 • D350127 •
D350735 • D351149 • D351150 • D352936 • D352937 • D352938 • D352939 • D358588 • D361565 • D372234 • D374630 • D374869 • D375493
• D376357 • D377345 • D377346 • D377347 • D377348 • D388075 • D446524 • EP0256296 • EP0260155 • EP0260156 • EP0295936 •
EP0325469 • EP0349770 • EP0368254 • EP0442215 • EP0498366 • EP0531645 • EP0663643 • EP0698251 • EP01330772 • GB2252333 •
GB2284086 • GB2301691 • GB2304954 • GB2307093 • GB2308267 • GB2308678 • GB2319103 • GB2333163 • GB2343079 • GB2344486 •
GB2345568 • GB2354340 • ISR107546 • ISR118507 • ISR118508 • JP1962823 • JP1971216 • JP2513442 • JP2732459 • JP2829331 •
JP2953593 • JP2964278 • MEX185552 • MEX187245 • RE37166 • RE40071 • Other Patents Pending

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 1. Introduction .................................................................................... 1-1
Manual Overview ........................................................................................... 1-1
How to Use This Manual ............................................................................ 1-2
Scanner Nomenclature ................................................................................... 1-3
Connectors .............................................................................................. 1-4
Physical Parameters ....................................................................................... 1-5
Scanning ................................................................................................ 1-5
AC Adapter ............................................................................................. 1-5
Electrical Specifications .................................................................................. 1-6
Laser and Product Safety ................................................................................ 1-8
Labeling ..................................................................................................... 1-10
Agency Compliances .................................................................................... 1-12
Bar Codes Supported ................................................................................... 1-13
Retail Codes .......................................................................................... 1-13
Industrial Codes ..................................................................................... 1-13
Dual Bar Codes for Japan (2 label read) .................................................... 1-14

Chapter 2. Site Preparation and Installation................................................... 2-15


Unpacking .................................................................................................. 2-15
Operational Verification ................................................................................ 2-16
Installation: Model 2200VS ........................................................................... 2-17
Installation: Model 2300HS ........................................................................... 2-20

Chapter 3. Operation and Maintenance ........................................................... 3-23


Scanning Items: Model 2200VS ..................................................................... 3-24
Scanning Items: Model 2300HS ..................................................................... 3-25
Operational Controls .................................................................................... 3-26
Operational Modes ....................................................................................... 3-26
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation ........................................................... 3-26
Operating Mode ..................................................................................... 3-27
Additional Functions ..................................................................................... 3-29
Programming ........................................................................................ 3-29
Scanner Diagnostic Mode ........................................................................ 3-29
Scanner Reset ....................................................................................... 3-30
Operational Maintenance .............................................................................. 3-30
Cleaning ............................................................................................... 3-30

Chapter 4. Problem Isolation .......................................................................... 4-31


Diagnostic Procedures .................................................................................. 4-32
Error Codes ................................................................................................ 4-33
Flowcharts .................................................................................................. 4-34

Chapter 5. Programming................................................................................. 5-39


Introduction to Label Programming ................................................................ 5-39
Understanding the Basics ............................................................................. 5-39
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System .............................................. 5-40

Product Reference Guide i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation ......................................................5-40
Programming Overview .................................................................................5-42
Programming via Handheld Device ............................................................5-42
What Is Programming Mode? ...................................................................5-43
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. ...................................................5-43
Programming Session .............................................................................5-44
LED and Beeper Indicators ............................................................................5-48
If You Make a Mistake... ................................................................................5-48
Return to Factory Settings .......................................................................5-48
Test Mode .............................................................................................5-49
General Scanner Features .............................................................................5-50
Scanner Button Options ...........................................................................5-50
Double Read Timeout ..............................................................................5-52
Laser Timeout ........................................................................................5-54
Motor Timeout .......................................................................................5-56
Label Gone Timeout ................................................................................5-59
Auxiliary Port Mode .................................................................................5-62
Auxiliary Port Baud Rate ..........................................................................5-64
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT) .............................5-68
Indication Features ......................................................................................5-69
Green LED Idle State ..............................................................................5-69
Power-up Beep Control ............................................................................5-70
Good Read Beep Control ..........................................................................5-71
Good Read Beep Frequency .....................................................................5-72
Good Read Beep Length ..........................................................................5-74
Good Read Beep Volume .........................................................................5-75
Good Read When to Indicate ....................................................................5-78
EAS Features ...............................................................................................5-80
EAS Active State ....................................................................................5-80
EAS Timeout ..........................................................................................5-81
Interface Related Features ............................................................................5-82
Interface Type .......................................................................................5-82
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length ............................................ 5-103
Number of Host Transmission Buffers ...................................................... 5-104
AIM ID ................................................................................................ 5-105
Label ID Control ................................................................................... 5-107
Global Prefix ........................................................................................ 5-110
Global Suffix ........................................................................................ 5-112
Case Conversion ................................................................................... 5-114
IBM Features ............................................................................................. 5-116
IBM Interface Options ........................................................................... 5-116
IBM Number of Host Resets ................................................................... 5-117
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ................................................... 5-118
IBM Label Slicing Control ....................................................................... 5-119
IBM Maximum Label Slice Length ............................................................ 5-120
USB-OEM Scanner Device Type .............................................................. 5-121
RS-232 Features ........................................................................................ 5-122

ii Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Baud Rate ................................................................................ 5-122
RS-232 Number of Data Bits .................................................................. 5-126
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits .................................................................. 5-127
RS-232 Parity ...................................................................................... 5-128
RS-232 Hardware Control ...................................................................... 5-130
RS-232 Intercharacter Delay ................................................................. 5-133
RS-232 Software Flow Control ............................................................... 5-134
RS-232 Host Echo ................................................................................ 5-135
RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval ............................................................ 5-136
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands ............................................................. 5-137
RS-232 TTL ......................................................................................... 5-138
RS-232 TTL Invert ............................................................................... 5-139
RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable ................................................. 5-140
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL ................................................................... 5-141
RS-232 Beep on Not on File ................................................................... 5-142
RS-232 ACK NAK Enable ....................................................................... 5-143
RS-232 ACK Character .......................................................................... 5-145
RS-232 NAK Character .......................................................................... 5-146
RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout ........................................................ 5-147
RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value ............................................................ 5-148
RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count ................................................................ 5-149
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling ............................................................ 5-150
RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure ..................................................... 5-152
Single Cable RS-232 Options ....................................................................... 5-153
Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable ........................................................ 5-154
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection .................................................. 5-155
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC ................................................................ 5-158
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK ......................................................... 5-159
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX ................................................................ 5-160
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character .................................................. 5-161
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character .................................................. 5-162
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features ..................................................... 5-163
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout .................................................. 5-163
Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval .......................................................... 5-172
Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State ....................................................... 5-173
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation ............................................. 5-175
Keyboard Interface — Control Characters ................................................ 5-176
Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay ............................................. 5-178
Symbology Programming ............................................................................ 5-179
Coupon Control .................................................................................... 5-179
UPC-A Enable ............................................................................................ 5-181
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission ........................................ 5-182
UPC-A Check Character Transmission ..................................................... 5-183
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 ...................................................................... 5-184
UPC-A Label ID .................................................................................... 5-185
UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................... 5-186
UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................... 5-187

Product Reference Guide iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID .......................................................... 5-188
UPC-A Minimum Reads .......................................................................... 5-189
UPC-E Enable ............................................................................................ 5-191
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ........................................ 5-192
UPC-E Check Character Transmission ...................................................... 5-193
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ........................................................................ 5-194
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 ....................................................................... 5-195
UPC-E Label ID .................................................................................... 5-196
UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................... 5-197
UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................... 5-198
UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID .......................................................... 5-199
UPC-E Minimum Reads .......................................................................... 5-200
EAN-13 Enable .......................................................................................... 5-202
EAN-13 First Character Transmission ....................................................... 5-203
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission .................................................... 5-204
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable ............................................................. 5-205
EAN 13 Label ID ................................................................................... 5-206
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................... 5-207
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................... 5-208
EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID ........................................................ 5-209
EAN-13 Minimum Reads ........................................................................ 5-210
Bookland Label ID ................................................................................ 5-212
EAN-8 Enable ............................................................................................ 5-213
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission ...................................................... 5-214
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 ....................................................................... 5-215
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion ................................................................. 5-216
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution ............................................................ 5-217
EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution .................................................... 5-218
EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves ............................................................. 5-219
EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves ............................................................ 5-220
EAN 8 Label ID ..................................................................................... 5-221
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................... 5-222
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................... 5-223
EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID .......................................................... 5-224
EAN-8 Decoding Levels .......................................................................... 5-225
EAN-8 Minimum Reads .......................................................................... 5-228
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length ............................................................ 5-230
Other UPC/EAN Options .............................................................................. 5-236
Price Weight Check ............................................................................... 5-237
In-Store Label Minimum Reads ............................................................... 5-240
Enable EAN Two Label ........................................................................... 5-242
EAN Two Label Combined Transmission ................................................... 5-243
UPC/EAN Guard Insertion ...................................................................... 5-244
UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves ......................................................... 5-245
UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves ........................................................ 5-246
UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction ......................................................... 5-247
EAN Two Label Minimum Reads .............................................................. 5-248

iv Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Correlation ............................................................................ 5-250
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length ....................................................... 5-251
Addons ............................................................................................... 5-257
Addon Timer ....................................................................................... 5-261
2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads ............................................................ 5-262
5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads ............................................................ 5-264
Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads ......................................................... 5-266
GTIN Enable ............................................................................................. 5-268
GTIN Label ID ..................................................................................... 5-269
GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ....................................................... 5-270
GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ....................................................... 5-271
GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID ................................................... 5-272
DataBar Omnidirectional Enable .................................................................. 5-273
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation ........................................... 5-274
DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID ........................................................... 5-275
DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads ................................................ 5-276
DataBar Expanded Enable ........................................................................... 5-278
DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation ................................................... 5-279
DataBar Expanded Label ID ................................................................... 5-280
DataBar Expanded Length Control .......................................................... 5-281
DataBar Expanded Length 1 .................................................................. 5-282
DataBar Expanded Length 2 .................................................................. 5-283
DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads ........................................................ 5-284
Code 39 Enable ......................................................................................... 5-286
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission ............................................. 5-287
Code 39 Check Character Calculation ...................................................... 5-288
Code 39 Check Character Transmission ................................................... 5-289
Code 39 Full ASCII ............................................................................... 5-290
Code 39 Label ID ................................................................................. 5-291
Code 39 Require Quiet Zones ................................................................ 5-292
Code 39 Length Control ........................................................................ 5-293
Code 39 Length 1 ................................................................................. 5-294
Code 39 Length 2 ................................................................................. 5-295
Code 39 Correlation ............................................................................. 5-296
Code 39 Stitching ................................................................................ 5-297
Code 39 Minimum Reads ....................................................................... 5-298
Pharmacode 39 Enable ............................................................................... 5-300
Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission ................................... 5-301
Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission ......................................... 5-302
Pharmacode 39 Label ID ....................................................................... 5-303
Code 128 Enable ....................................................................................... 5-304
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters .................................................. 5-305
Convert Code 128 to Code 39 ................................................................ 5-306
Code 128 Label ID ............................................................................... 5-307
Code 128 Length Control ....................................................................... 5-308
Code 128 Length 1 ............................................................................... 5-309
Code 128 Length 2 ............................................................................... 5-310

Product Reference Guide v

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Correlation ............................................................................ 5-311
Code 128 Stitching ............................................................................... 5-312
Code 128 Minimum Reads ..................................................................... 5-313
EAN-128 Enable ......................................................................................... 5-315
EAN-128 Label ID ................................................................................. 5-316
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable .............................................................. 5-317
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ....................................................... 5-318
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission .................................................... 5-319
I 2 of 5 Label ID ................................................................................... 5-320
I 2 of 5 Length Control .......................................................................... 5-321
I 2 of 5 Length 1 .................................................................................. 5-322
I 2 of 5 Length 2 .................................................................................. 5-323
I 2 of 5 Correlation ............................................................................... 5-324
I 2 of 5 Stitching .................................................................................. 5-325
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ........................................................................ 5-326
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable .............................................................. 5-328
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ............................................ 5-329
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ......................................... 5-330
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID ....................................................................... 5-331
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control ............................................................... 5-332
Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 ....................................................................... 5-333
Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 ....................................................................... 5-334
Standard 2 of 5 Correlation .................................................................... 5-335
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching ....................................................................... 5-336
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ............................................................. 5-337
Codabar Enable ......................................................................................... 5-339
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission ............................................. 5-340
Codabar Start Stop Character Set ........................................................... 5-341
Codabar Start Stop Character Match ....................................................... 5-343
Codabar Check Character Calculation ...................................................... 5-344
Codabar Check Character Transmission ................................................... 5-345
Codabar Label ID .................................................................................. 5-346
Codabar Require Quiet Zones ................................................................. 5-347
Codabar Length Control ......................................................................... 5-348
Codabar Length 1 ................................................................................. 5-349
Codabar Length 2 ................................................................................. 5-350
Codabar Correlation .............................................................................. 5-351
Codabar Stitching ................................................................................. 5-352
Codabar Minimum Reads ....................................................................... 5-353
Code 93 Enable ......................................................................................... 5-355
Code 93 Label ID .................................................................................. 5-356
Code 93 Length Control ......................................................................... 5-357
Code 93 Length 1 ................................................................................. 5-358
Code 93 Length 2 ................................................................................. 5-359
Code 93 Correlation .............................................................................. 5-360
Code 93 Stitching ................................................................................. 5-361
Code 93 Minimum Reads ....................................................................... 5-362

vi Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable .................................................................................... 5-364
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation ................................................ 5-365
MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters ................................................ 5-366
MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission ............................................. 5-367
MSI/Plessey Label ID ............................................................................ 5-368
MSI/Plessey Length Control ................................................................... 5-369
MSI/Plessey Length 1 ........................................................................... 5-370
MSI/Plessey Length 2 ........................................................................... 5-371
MSI/Plessey Correlation ........................................................................ 5-372
MSI/Plessey Stitching ........................................................................... 5-373
MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads ................................................................. 5-374

Appendix A. LED/Beeper Indications & Controls ............................. A-377


Volume/Tone Push Button ..................................................................... A-378
Green LED Indicator ............................................................................. A-379

Appendix B. Cable Information........................................................ B-381

Appendix C. Keypad......................................................................... C-383

Appendix D. Host Commands........................................................... D-391

Appendix E. Handheld Data Format Requirements .......................... E-393


Handheld Data Format Requirements General .......................................... E-393
Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements ........................................ E-394
AIM Formats ....................................................................................... E-402

Appendix F. Keyboard Function Key Mappings................................. F-409


Keyboard Model Cross Reference ................................................................. F-409

Product Reference Guide vii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


viii Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 1
Introduction
This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on
how to install the scanner, how to program it using special programming
feature bar code labels, and advanced user information as described in the
following overview.

Manual Overview
Chapter 1, Introduction, presents the manual’s contents, describes features
and specifications, provides regulatory and safety information, and lists
the bar code symbologies the scanner will read.
Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, supplies physical dimen-
sions for the scanner and its most common accessories, and details counter
preparation and installation. Cable routing, connection and testing are
also explained in this section.
Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance, describes use and maintenance;
providing details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic
modes. Scanner routine maintenance is outlined in this section as well.
Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, provides an outline of three scanner test
modes: Selftest, Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests. Descriptions of
the error indications if the scanner detects a system problem and trouble-
shooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented.
Chapter 5, Programming, details procedures and provides custom bar-
codes for setting programmable scanner features. This section is organized
by the categories: General Features, Interface Related Features and Sym-
bology Related Features.
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls, lists the various func-
tions and indications of the scanner control panel features.

Product Reference Guide 1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Appendix B, Cable Information, outlines wire requirements, connector


specifications and pinout details for associated product cabling.
Appendix C, Keypad, furnishes bar codes representing the digits and char-
acters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain
programming sessions.
Appendix D, Host Commands, contains a partial listing of available host
commands that can be used with a compatible host interface.
Appendix E, Factory Defaults, is a listing of standard factory defaults for
the various programmable features.
Appendix E, Handheld Data Format Requirements, provides application
notes to describe the general format of data that can be accepted by the
scanner through the auxiliary port as transmitted from a handheld scan-
ner.

How to Use This Manual


You’ll find it helpful to familiarize yourself with the first section of this
manual, since it provides both a general description of the product’s fea-
tures and an overview of the manual’s contents and organization. Refer-
ence the other sections as required for information about scanner
installation, operation, maintenance and bar code programming.

1-2 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Scanner Nomenclature

Manual Conventions

‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful and rec-


ommended. They provide information that is critical to
operations and/or procedures described in this manual.

‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling


(adherence to the procedures described) is required to
avoid damage to equipment and/or property.

‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical harm or


injury. These statements do not include potentially fatal
hazards, which would be designated as ‘DANGER’
blocks. Use of this product does not warrant the need for
a DANGER block.

Scanner Nomenclature
Controls, indicators and other nomenclature are shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1. Scanner Nomenclature

Speaker

Scan Model 2200VS


Window
Volume/Tone
Indicator Push Button
LED plus Indicator LED
Volume/Tone Upper Scan Lower Scan
Push Button Window Window

Top Cover

Model 2300HS

Product Reference Guide 1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Connectors
The appearance of the connector panel will vary depending upon the fac-
tory options purchased with your model. Reference Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2. Connector Panel

Scanne
r Host
Aux. Por
t
Power

EAS Opening

Scanner Host Aux. Port Power

EAS Connection POS TERMINAL AUXILIARY PORT POWER


· Electronic Article Surveillance · Label Data · Test Port · DC Brick Input
Connection · Application Download · On Screen
(where appropriate) Programming (OSP)
· Application Download
· RS-232 Handheld Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232 Label Data Output
· EAS interlock
Connection to this port is Optional Connection to this port is Optional

1-4 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Physical Parameters

Physical Parameters
This section provides specifications for performance, environmental and
electrical parameters. Reference the second section of this manual, Site
Preparation and Installation, for physical measurements of all models and
some accessories.

Scanning
The scanner has a scan zone immediately in front of (or above) the scan
window where the scanner projects laser light in order to scan items. Scan
lines form a zone where bar code labels are read. Refer to the Operation
and Maintenance section of this manual for more details about the topic:
Scanning Items: Model 2200VS.

AC Adapter
Figure 1-3 is an illustration of the AC/DC Adapter .

Figure 1-3. AC/DC Adapter

OR

Product Reference Guide 1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Figure 1-4. Environmental Specifications

Operation
+40 C +104 F

10 C 50 F

Temperature
10 to +40 C
50 to +104 F
Dust Resistant
Optics Cavity, IP5X

Illumination
Artificial Light: Sunlight:
450 Foot-candles 0-8,000 Foot-candles

Humidity
5 - 95% NC

Storage
+70 C +158 F

-40 C -40 F
POS
Scan
ner

Temperature
-40 to +70 C
-40 to +158 F

Electrical Specifications
Before installation, always verify that the site’s electrical service meets the
scanner’s requirements. The scanner has been engineered for compatibility
with most international electrical systems. Verify that the power source
will supply “clean” electrical power to the equipment; that is, it must be
free of excess electrical noise.
If the adapter will not plug into your AC power receptacle, the model
shipped is not compatible with your electrical system. Please contact your
distributor immediately to receive the necessary information and compo-
nents to ensure electrical compatibility.

1-6 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Electrical Specifications

Safe operation of your scanner or scanner requires properly grounded elec-


trical outlets. Be sure to have a qualified electrician certify the earth-ground
connection on circuits which will be used to power the unit.
CAUTION

The scanner is powered on/off by connecting/disconnecting its AC power


supply.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Laser and Product Safety


Laser safety requirements are based on IEC Standard Publication 60825-1
(2001) and CDRH 21CFR, Chapter 1, Subchapter J and (CDRH) Laser
Product Performance Standard, User information [1040.10(h)1]:
• User Maintenance. No user maintenance of the system other than
cleaning of the scan window(s) is required.
• Radiant Energy. The scanner is an IEC Class 1 and CDRH IIa laser
product. The system uses two embedded Class 3R Visible Laser
Diodes (VLDs) operating at 650.0 or 670.0 nm, in an opto-
mechanical scanner, resulting in less than 3.9µW radiated power as
observed through a 7mm aperture and averaged over 10 seconds.
Maximum emitted peak output power at the window is 760µW. No
attempt should be made by the user to remove the protective hous-
ing of the scanner.
• Laser Light Viewing. The scan window is the only aperture through
which laser light may be observed in this product.
Exposure to the light emitted from the scan window(s) has been shown
not to be harmful. The safety record of bar code scanning is perfect after
millions of hours of use worldwide. This safe and efficient use of laser
technology has gained wide acceptance in industries throughout the
world.
Operators and installers of the unit should observe the following cautions
and warnings:

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those


specified herein may result in hazardous laser light exposure.

The use of optical instruments with the scanner will increase eye hazard.
CAUTION (Optical instruments include binoculars, microscopes, telescopes and magni-
fying glasses. This does not include eyeglasses worn by the user).

To prevent exposure to laser light, do not remove the protective housing of the
scanner. There are no user-serviceable parts inside the unit.

1-8 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Laser and Product Safety

Safety precautions to be taken:

No adjustments or alteration of the scanner housing are to be attempted by the


user.

The failure of the facet wheel motor while the unit is continuing to emit a laser
CAUTION beam causes the emission levels to exceed those for inherently safe operation.
The unit has safeguards to prevent this occurrence. If, however, a stationary
laser beam is ever emitted, the failing unit should be disconnected from its
power supply until repaired by a qualified technician.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment gener-
WARNING ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his or her own expense.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-0003.


Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est confireme à la norme NMB-
0003 du Canada.

Product Reference Guide 1-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Labeling
Regulatory, reference and safety labeling for both models is shown in
Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-5. Labeling: Model 2200VS

PSC Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402 USA
XXXXXXXXXXXX
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
Product of USA
This illustration shows general label
(2) this device must accept any interference received, U S
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THIS LASER PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21CFR 1040 AS APPLICABLE AS A CLASS IIA PRODUCT shape/content ONLY. For actual
Pr nit
st ty

od or
mo
te fe

uc ed
ed

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. N263


Sa

tio
n

Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est confirme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. CAUTION - CLASS 3R LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

regulatory, patent and other


PRODUCT SERVICE

NRTL AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.


COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING U.S. PATENTS: 4,709,195
Use ONLY PSC INC. AC/DC Power Supply 4,709,369 4,712,853 4,749,879 4,786,798 4,792,666 4,798,943 4,799,164
Input: 50 - 60 Hz (0.5 - 0.25A) Output:
4,816,660 4,861,972 4,861,973 4,866,257 4,868,836 4,879,456 4,963,719

information, view the labels on the


100 - 240VAC (P/N 8-0582) +5V
4,991,692 5,144,118 5,179,270 5,198,649 5,247,162 5,229,588 5,410,108
+12V
Power: 18 Watts (max) 5,459,308 5,440,110 5,475,207 5,493,108 5,705,802 5,723,852 5,834,708
6-1012

product, or contact your nearest


sales or service office.

Host Au x

EAS Opening

Scanner Host Aux. Port Power

IEC CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT


Class IIa Laser Product. Avoid long term viewing of direct
laser light. Appareil á laser de classe IIa. Eviter toute
exposition prolongée de la vue à lumière laser directe.

6-1018

1-10 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Labeling

Figure 1-6. Labeling: Model 2300HS

IEC CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT


Class IIa Laser Product. Avoid long term viewing of direct
laser light. Appareil á laser de classe IIa. Eviter toute
exposition prolongée de la vue à lumière laser directe.

6-1018

Host Aux
EAS Opening

Scanner Host Aux. Port Power

PSC Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402 USA
XXXXXXXXXXXX
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Product of USA
This illustration shows general label shape/content
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
U S ONLY. For actual regulatory, patent and other
THIS LASER PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21CFR 1040 AS APPLICABLE AS A CLASS IIA PRODUCT
information, view the labels on the product, or
Pr nit
st ty

od
mo
te fe

uc
ed

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. N263


Sa

tio ed
or
n

Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est confirme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. PRODUCT SERVICE CAUTION - CLASS 3R LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
NRTL AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.
COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING U.S. PATENTS: 4,709,195
Use ONLY PSC INC. AC/DC Power Supply
Input: 50 - 60 Hz (0.5 - 0.25A)
100 - 240VAC (P/N 8-0582)
Output:
+5V
+12V
4,709,369 4,712,853 4,749,879 4,786,798 4,792,666 4,798,943 4,799,164
4,816,660 4,861,972 4,861,973 4,866,257 4,868,836 4,879,456 4,963,719
4,991,692 5,144,118 5,179,270 5,198,649 5,247,162 5,229,588 5,410,108
contact your nearest sales or service office.
Power: 18 Watts (max) 5,459,308 5,440,110 5,475,207 5,493,108 5,705,802 5,723,852 5,834,708
6-1012

Product Reference Guide 1-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Agency Compliances
The scanner meets or exceeds the requirements for its device type as set
forth by the following agencies and regulations:

COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS

Electrical

United States UL 1950 TÜV NRTL

Canada CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1950 TÜV NRTL

World IEC60950 / IEC 825-1:2001 TÜV CB

Emmisions

United States 47CFR Part 15J FCC

Canada ICES-0003 Class B

Europe EN 55022 Class B

Australia/N Zealand AS/NZ 3548 Class B

Japan VCCI Class B

Taiwan CNS 13438 Class B

Safety & Emissions EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE Mark

LV Directive 73/23/EEC CE Mark

Laser Safety

United States CDRH, 21CFR Part 1040 CDRH Class IIa laser device

Canada same as CDRH SGM-1 specification

Australia AS 2211 Class 1

Europe IEC 60825-1 Class 1

Contact Datalogic® Marketing or your Datalogic Scanning representative


for a complete listing of approvals for other countries.

1-12 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Bar Codes Supported

Bar Codes Supported


The scanner can read/decode the following bar code types (symbologies):

Retail Codes
• UPC Versions A & E with full expansion E to A, plus A and E to 13
capability
• UPC Supplementals and Add-ons (Bookland & Coupon code,
UPC two character supplemental encodation and UPC five charac-
ter supplemental encodation and supplemental C128) with support
for conditional add-ons
• DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14)
• DataBar Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) maximum characters
74 numeric or 41 alpha
• DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14 Stacked)
• EAN 8 & 13 with full expansion 8 to 13
• JAN 8 & 13 with full expansion 8 to 13
• UCC/EAN 128
• Italian Pharmacode (Code 39)
• Support GTIN

Industrial Codes
• Code 39
• Code 39 full ASCII
• Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39)
• Code 93
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
• Standard 2 of 5
• Codabar
• MSI/Plessey

Product Reference Guide 1-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction

Dual Bar Codes for Japan (2 label read)

The following qualifications apply to Dual Bar Codes for Japan:

NOTE

• Two label combined transmission


• Two label global midamble (see Chapter 5, Programming, for more
details)
• Two label flag is set by selecting any 4 digits as the flag

1-14 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 2
Site Preparation and
Installation
This chapter outlines the procedures for unpacking the scanner, verifying
function, preparing the countertop or wall, routing cables, and installing
the scanner.

Unpacking
To unpack the unit:
• Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred dur-
ing shipping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier immedi-
ately.
• Lift any accessories from the box, including the AC/DC Power Sup-
ply, and the Quick Reference Guide.
• Familiarize yourself with the Quick Reference Guide. Leave the
guide at the checkstand when the installation is complete.
• Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the scanner from
the carton. Be sure to save the box and all packing material. In the
event of failure, the unit must be returned to the factory in its origi-
nal packaging.
Proceed to the Operational Verification instructions below.

Product Reference Guide 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Site Preparation and Installation

Operational Verification
Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is
fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to
your POS system:
1. [2200VS scanners ONLY] Remove the mounting bracket.
2. Plug the connector from the AC/DC Adapter into the scanner (see
Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1. Scanner Connections

Scanner
Host
Aux. Port
Power

EAS Opening

Scanner Host Aux. Port Power

EAS Connection POS TERMINAL AUXILIARY PORT POWER


· Electronic Article Surveillance · Label Data · Test Port · DC Brick Input
Connection · Application Download · On Screen
(where appropriate) Programming (OSP)
· Application Download
· RS-232 Handheld Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232 Label Data Output
· EAS interlock
Connection to this port is Optional Connection to this port is Optional

3. Plug the AC Adapter into an AC power outlet.

16 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Installation: Model 2200VS

4. The scanner should beep to indicate it has passed the power-up


Selftest routine, and the green LED (lamp) will light continuously,
indicating the scanner is ready to scan.

Reference Chapter 4, Problem Isolation if the scanner


does not perform as expected.
NOTE

5. Scan a few known-good bar code labels to verify operation. Upon


reading each bar code, the scanner should beep once and flash its
green LED.
Your scanner may only read one or two bar codes when not
connected to a host terminal, requiring that you reset the
scanner before it will read again. This is normal, as some
interface types require the scanner to “buffer” (store) data
NOTE until the terminal signals its readiness to accept the data.

Once you’re satisfied of the scanner’s operation, disconnect power and


proceed to the installation instructions.

Installation: Model 2200VS


The Magellan® 2200VS scanner can either be used “freestanding,” or can
be conveniently mounted to a countertop or wall using the mounting
bracket. Provide a secure installation as described below.
1. Determine the best location for scanner installation. Some consider-
ations are:
• Cable routing to and from the scanner: Can cables and connected
devices be routed in such a way as to be protected from damage or
tampering? Depending on your installation, it may be necessary
to drill a 1-1/4” (3.2cm) hole in the countertop or wall.
• Mounting stability. Avoid placing the scanner in such a way as to
subject it to excess vibration, bumping, spillage, etc.
• Peripheral connections from the scanner, such as a handheld
device.

Product Reference Guide 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Site Preparation and Installation

2. Determine if a cable-routing hole is necessary. If so, hold the scan-


ner or mounting bracket in the desired, installed position to deter-
mine the center of the hole. Mark the center and drill a 1-1/4”
(3.2cm) hole.
3. Secure the mount to the counter or wall using two #6 (3.5mm) pan
head screws (see Figure 2-2d). If the scanner is to be used “free-
standing” (not attached), remove the mounting bracket (if installed)
to take advantage of the non-skid pads located on the bottom of the
scanner.
4. Remove the Connector Cover and connect the cables to the scanner.
Reference Figure 2-2a and Figure 2-1.
5. Route the cables as shown in Figure 2-2b or Figure 2-2c.
6. Switch the terminal OFF.
7. Connect the interface cable to the terminal.
8. Connect the AC Adapter to the AC outlet.
9. Switch the terminal ON.
10. Verify operation by scanning a few known-good bar code labels. The
scanner should now be communicating the bar code data to the
POS terminal.

Reference Chapter 4, Problem Isolation if the scanner


does not perform as expected.
NOTE

11. Slide the scanner into its mount until it’s fully seated; taking care to
guide cables so they won’t be pinched or trapped between assem-
blies. Reference Figure 2-2d.
This completes the installation instructions.

Figure 2-2. Magellan® 2200VS Installation

18 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Installation: Model 2200VS

Route cables for countertop mount

a Connector Cover
b
Route cables for wall mount T

To
o

C ou
W

c d nte
a

rto
ll

Product Reference Guide 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Site Preparation and Installation

Installation: Model 2300HS


The Magellan® 2300HS scanner is mounted flush with the countertop to
promote comfortable and ergonomic slide-through scanning. Installation
as described below.
1. Determine the best location for scanner. Some considerations are:
• Proximity to the user. Verify that checkstand features allow the
unit to be within easy reach of the user, without interfering with
cash drawers or other equipment.
• Cable routing to and from the scanner: Can cables and connected
devices be routed in such a way as to be protected from damage or
tampering?
• Mounting stability. Avoid placing the scanner in such a way as to
subject it to excess vibration, bumping, spillage, etc.
• Peripheral connections from the scanner, such as a handheld
device.
2. The countertop must be modified to accept the scanner. At the time
of this writing, three options are available.

— Figure 2-3a shows the dimensions for the opening and other
details if a shelf is to be built to support the unit.

— Figure 2-3b details the cutout dimensions if an adapter fixture


holding the scanner will rest with its rim above the countertop.

— Figure 2-3c provides dimensions if an adapter fixture holding


the scanner will be recessed to be flush with the countertop.
3. Remove the Connector Cover, then connect and route the cables at
the scanner. Reference Figure 2-4.
4. Seat the scanner or in the countertop opening (or adapter).
5. Switch the terminal OFF.
6. Connect the interface cable to the terminal.
7. Connect the scanner’s AC Adapter to the AC outlet.
8. Switch the terminal ON.

20 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Installation: Model 2300HS

Figure 2-3. Countertop Modification Options

a. Shelf installation b. Adapter w/flange above counter

6.07"
(154.2mm) 6.26"
(159mm)

Rim of
6.07" adapter
Cut hole (154.2mm)
Cut hole 6.26"
(159mm)

Rim rests on top of counter


3.42"
(86.9mm)
3.47"
(88.1mm)
Shelf Depth

c. Adapter w/flange recessed to be flush with counter


7.40" Radius 0.21" (5.3mm) x4
(188mm)
Routing is 0.050" (1.27mm) deep

6.26" 7.91"
(159mm) (201mm)

Routed ledge
for rim 6.26"
(159mm)
Cut hole
Rim is flush with counter

3.52"
(89.4mm)

Product Reference Guide 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Site Preparation and Installation

Figure 2-4. Magellan® 2300HS Cable Routing Options

Connector Cover

9. Verify operation by scanning a few known-good bar code labels. The


scanner should now be communicating the bar code data to the
POS terminal.

Reference Chapter 4, Problem Isolation if the scanner


does not perform as expected.
NOTE

This completes the installation instructions for this model.

22 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 3
Operation and
Maintenance
The information contained in this section describes how to operate and
maintain the scanner. Topics include scanning tips, and scan window
cleaning and replacement.

Product Reference Guide 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operation and Maintenance

Scanning Items: Model 2200VS


Item bar codes are scanned by either...
• sliding or pushing items through the scan volume in a right-to-left
or left-to-right motion (see Figure 1a). This is known as “Sweep”
scanning, and is the best choice for high throughput super- and
hypermarket installations where it is necessary to minimize the need
to grip or lift items.
• moving the bar code directly toward the scan window to be read (see
Figure 1b). This “Presentation” technique is most often used in low
throughput variety, convenience market and pharmacy applications
where usable countertop space is at a premium and “Sweep” scan-
ning is not possible.

Figure 1. Sweep and Presentation Scanning Technique

Items are Scan Volume


Scanner
Item pushed or
Bar slid past
Code scanner
Scanner
a

Item
Bar Code

Scan Volume
a Sweep Technique b Presentation Technique

24 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Scanning Items: Model 2300HS

Scanning Items: Model 2300HS


The scanner is mounted so its scan window is flush with the countertop.
This allows for maximum working space, and also permits the user to slide
items over its surface without having to grasp or pick them up. Bar codes
are effortlessly scanned when swept through the zone projected from the
substantial scan window as shown in Figure 1a.

Facing bar code labels in the direction of scanning, or toward the scan
window will optimize the scan rate. The arrow on the scanner’s top
cover indicates the direction scanned items should be moved (see
Figure 1b).
NOTE

Figure 3-1. Operating the Scanner

Items are
Item pushed or
Bar slid past Scan Volume
Code scanner

Product
Flow
Scanner

Product Reference Guide 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operation and Maintenance

Operational Controls
The function of scanner controls and indicators is listed in Appendix A,
LED/Beeper Indications & Controls. Turn to that appendix for full
details.

Operational Modes
The scanner features a number of modes that are important to both the
user and the system support personnel. These modes can be combined
into three groups: pre-operational, operational; and additional functions.
The following text describes these modes, what they mean, and how and
when they are seen.

Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation


Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed
before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the
LED (lamp) indicating readiness for operation. These steps include
Power-Up Selftest, Error Reporting, and Operational Configuration.

Power-Up/Selftest
Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner’s software
immediately begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are func-
tioning properly. This routine, which only takes a few seconds, checks all
the functions of the scanner and interface prior to indicating that it is
ready for operation.

A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable fea-


ture. See the topic Power-up Beep Control in Chapter 5 of
this manual.
NOTE

26 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operational Modes

Error Reporting
If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation, the scanner will not
advance to Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the
scanner to sound a long, low tone. When this occurs, error codes may be
accessed by momentarily pressing the Volume/Tone Push Button. The
beeper and LED will then emit a coded series of indications to assist the
repair technician in identifying the failed component. If an error is indi-
cated, make note of the tones heard/LED flashes. A table containing a list-
ing of the error codes is included in Chapter 4.

Operational Configuration
Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if
configured to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state.
The scanner will automatically load your specific interface settings which
are required to communicate with the host system.
No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in this state.
Progress is halted until the label has been removed, thereby ensuring that
no extraneous bar code data is send to the host. When the scanner com-
pletes its Selftest successfully, it emits a tone (when configured to do so)
and enters Operating Mode.

Operating Mode
Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning) and Sleep Mode.
These two modes are most commonly observed by the user/operator.

Normal Operation
This condition is indicated by the green light being on dim and steady.

LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be pro-


grammed to operate in the standard manner described above.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operation and Maintenance

Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown


sequence. If there is no activity during a preset period of time (also called
time-out1), the unit will shut off the laser and/or motor in order to pro-
long the life of the electrical and mechanical components. Once the scan-
ner has timed out, it enters Sleep Mode.

Sleep Mode
After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the laser
and/or motor automatically turns off (goes to sleep). This state is called
Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light (blinking
at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press the Volume/Tone Push
Button, wave your hand in front of the scan window, or scan an item
using an attached auxiliary scanner (if present). The scanner will recognize
these signals as a wake-up call and instantly return to Normal Operation.

1. “Timeout” and “Sleep Mode” time delays are programmable features that can be selected through
use of the programming bar codes included in Chapter 5.

28 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Additional Functions

Additional Functions
Additional scanner functions include programming, running scanner
diagnostics, or initiating a reset.

Programming
Scanners are typically programmed at the factory to settings specified by
the customer. Generally, POS system interface and bar code symbologies
are pre-configured to operate in the target environment. Chapter 5 con-
tains the necessary instructions, bar codes, and descriptions to program/
reprogram scanner settings.

Scanner Diagnostic Mode


While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is
allowed, permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes
while troubleshooting problems. Under normal operation, the scanner
stores label data, awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host. When
the scanner is not connected to a host, it may read and store only up to
two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing the memory).
This mode of operation removes this limitation.
To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Volume/Tone
Push Button for approximately four seconds. While pressing the button,
the scanner will first sound three tones, wait a few seconds, then sound six
rapid tones; after which you should immediately release the button.
To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the scanner or press and
hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner.
See the topic, Scanner Reset, below for more information about scanner
resets.
Turn to Chapter 4 for a description of error codes resulting from diagnos-
tics.

Product Reference Guide 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operation and Maintenance

Scanner Reset
As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary to reset the
electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset command to
the scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has been switched
off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on. Reset can also be
used to initiate and run the scanner’s internal Selftest routine.
Pressing and holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately
eight seconds initiates a reset, which is sounded by a rapid number of
beeps. If the motor had been spinning, the lamps will blink while the
motor spins down. At that point, the motor will spin back up and the
scanner will continue to run the Selftest diagnostics. For more informa-
tion, see the topic, Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation, earlier in this
chapter.

Operational Maintenance
The scanner will provide dependable service for many years. The follow-
ing maintenance procedures will keep it operating at peak performance.

Cleaning
Clean the exterior surface of the scan window at least twice daily with a
nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free
cleaning tissues. Textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be
cleaned using these cleaning agents.

30 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 4
Problem Isolation
In the event of a suspected functional problem, use the troubleshooting
references provided in this section. This useful information will help you
identify and resolve the cause of the problem.
The scanner incorporates features that indicate when a problem occurs.
The scanner may:
• emit a series of tones
• flash the LED (lamp)
Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational
tests and Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the fol-
lowing pages.

Power-Up Selftest
The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be suc-
cessfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation.
This pre-operational period is the time between power-up and normal
operation during which the motor comes up-to-speed and software, firm-
ware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all subsystems
are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode (VLD).
Refer to Chapter 3, Operational Modes, for a more detailed description
of this and other scanner modes.

Operational Tests
These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and
Sleep Mode. Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections as
well as the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally. If a
problem is detected at any time, a long, low tone is sounded and operation
may be halted. If you press the Volume/Tone Push Button at that time, a
series of tones will be sounded in concert with LED flashes.

Product Reference Guide 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Problem Isolation

Diagnostic Tests
See Chapter 3, Scanner Diagnostic Mode for details about running diag-
nostic tests for the scanner. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics,
the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The
remainder of this section describes these failure indications and includes
troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem.

Diagnostic Procedures
Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that
operate as a system. Since almost all scanner problems are caused by either
the scanner, POS terminal or communication links between them, trou-
bleshooting flowcharts provided in this chapter focus on these compo-
nents. Additionally, the AC/DC Power Supply and scanner cables are
potential problems addressed.
The flowcharts provided here walk you through a diagnostic process that
will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the corrective action
required. Since internal scanner components cannot be replaced by an
operator or installer, most functional errors will require the assistance of a
trained technical support person. However, if the problem is caused by
faulty cable, or power supply, you can fix the problem by replacing the
defective component and complete the installation.

32 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Error Codes

Error Codes
If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a long low tone (for three
seconds) and flash its LED, indicating a failure. When this occurs, press
the Volume/Tone Push button to hear the error code. If it is configured to
do so, the scanner will sound a series of beeps corresponding to the error
code and/or flash its LED simultaneous to the beeps. The table below
describes what these codes mean and what action should be taken for
each.

When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections


first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.

Error
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Beep

No POS interface has been selected (Null interface). See Chapter 5,


Beeper
Configuration Interface Type to select the required interface using programming
“Chirp”
bar codes.

See Chapter 5 for details about configuring the scanner using pro-
1 Configuration Error
gramming bar codes.

2 Interface Board

3 Motor

4 Laser

6 Digital Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.

10 Button Module

11 Hardware ID

14 CPLD ID

Product Reference Guide 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Problem Isolation

Flowcharts
The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to
identify and troubleshoot problems with your system.

Figure 4-1. Problem Isolation: Start

For units using an AC/DC adapter, verify that...


1. AC Adapter is connected to a functional AC outlet.
2. Power cord is firmly connected to scanner.
If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the
Terminal POT), verify that the I/F cable is securely
START connected at both ends.

AC Scanner
Adapter

Power-up
Scanner power-up is signified by
any or all of the following:
- Facet wheel shows movement
- Laser turns on NO
- Status LED lights
- Speaker sounds tone(s)
Have you Check these
Does NO checked the YES potential problems:
the scanner power
power-up - AC/DC adaptor
Flashing Green LED ? connections - AC outlet
If the Green LED is flashing slowly, the ?
scanner is most likely in Sleep Mode.
Press and release the Volume/Tone YES
Push Button or wave your hand in front
of the vertical window to "wake-up" the
scanner.
A flashing Green LED can also mean Is the NO Ensure the Green LED is Is the NO
the scanner has been disabled by the Green LED enabled via pro- Green LED
POS terminal. To exit this mode, cycle Lit gramming bar codes. Lit
power or have the terminal re-enable ? ?
the scanner.
YES YES
Selftest Failure
If the scanner fails its Selftest, the
following takes place:
- Speaker sounds a tone at the lowest
value for approx. 3 seconds. Call Tech Support
- LED flashes on and off. Does
the scanner NO Go to Selftest
Consult the Selftest flowchart if you're pass Selftest
unsure the unit has passed Selftest. flowchart
?

YES

YES Will the NO


Other Problems? scanner read Go to Poor/No
Call Tech Support bar codes Reading flowchart
reliably
?

34 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Flowcharts

Figure 4-2. Problem Isolation: Selftest

SELFTEST
START

Is the Scan the Factory


Is the YES Defaults bar code in Is the YES
LED NO error code
blinking in error code Section 6 to enable the
1 default configuration
1
error ?
? ? file. Restart the unit.
NO
YES NO

No interface selected
(Null Interface).
Select an interface. Error YES
Beeps Call Tech Support
?

NO

Unit passes Selftest

Product Reference Guide 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Problem Isolation

Figure 4-3. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading

Have you verified that


the scan window(s) is/are clean
and scratch-free?
POOR/NO READING Before proceeding, verify that
START bar code samples presented
to scanner are of good quality
and a symbology the scanner
Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by can read.
holding the Volume/Tone Push
Button for 4 seconds (until first 3,
and then 6 rapid tones are sounded)
then release. Scan a known-good
bar code.

A good read is
signified by one
flash of the LED
and a single Does the
beep1. scanner read NO
the bar code Call Tech Support
satisfactorily
?
YES

Reset the scanner by


holding down the
Volume/Tone Push Button
for 8 seconds.

If unexpected data
is being sent from
the host to the
scanner, consider Does the Does the
scanner pass YES YES
enabling the scanner read DONE
programmable the data to satisfactorily
feature Ignore Host the POS ?
Commands to ?
debug the system. NO NO

Go to No Transmit to
POS flowchart Verify programmable
parameters using the
information and programming Does the YES
bar codes provided in Section scanner read DONE
5. Check bar code symbology satisfactorily
options and other configurable ?
features.
NO

Troubleshoot
the host or call
Tech Support.

1 LED and beeper indications are configurable


features. Behavior may vary from that described here.

36 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Flowcharts

Figure 4-4. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS

NO TRANSMIT TO POS
START

Check the interface (I/F) Verify programmable


cable connections. If parameters using the
possible, retest the information and programming Does the
system using a known- bar codes provided in Section YES
scanner read DONE
good I/F cable. 5. Check interface and I/F satisfactorily
options, inactive symbologies ?
and other configurable
features. NO

Does the
scanner pass NO
Troubleshoot
the data to the host or call
the POS Tech Support.
?
YES

DONE

This concludes the Problem Isolation Chapter.

Product Reference Guide 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Problem Isolation

NOTES

38 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 5
Programming

Introduction to Label Programming


The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you
to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner . To
ensure full compatibility and proper function, use only the programming
bar codes in this manual and other product-specific publications to pro-
gram scanner features.
This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all
levels to find the information needed to understand and configure fea-
tures. The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go
from here.

Understanding the Basics


If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code
labels, you should review the first few pages of this chapter to familiarize
yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any
changes to your configuration.

Product Reference Guide 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System
Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface
board, cable, etc.) to properly communicate with your host system. Con-
tact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner’s
hardware compatibility.
You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if
you have no record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the fac-
tory. Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for spe-
cific interface types; however, your scanner may have been custom
configured with settings that are unique to your company or application.
Once you know the scanner’s current settings, you can determine what
changes will be required to allow communication with your host system
and/or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installa-
tion. After recording the modifications needed, finish reading this chapter,
then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program
the scanner.
When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scan-
ner is ready to be placed into operation.

Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation


Most scanner programming falls within three general categories:
• General Scanner Features — are features common to all interface
types. Examples include beeper adjustments such as volume and
length, read verification settings, etc.
• EAS Features — control the settings for interfacing with the
[optional] EAS device.
• Interface Related Features — are the mandatory settings necessary
to allow communication with your host terminal. Examples of these
settings are: RS-232 baud rate and parity.
It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type
(for example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken
to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the
scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompati-
CAUTION ble interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable
DISCONNECTED.

40 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Integrating the Scanner With Your Host Sys-

Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the cur-
rent interface. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the
RS-232 interface. The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning
programming labels for features invalid to the current interface group.
NOTE

• Symbology Programming — gives the scanner the capability to


autodiscriminate as few as one, or as many as all available symbolo-
gies. For optimal scanner performance enable only those symbolo-
gies required. Additionally the scanner may be programmed with
the standard options available for the various symbologies, such as
check digit, minimum label length, fixed and variable length bar
codes, etc.
If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional infor-
mation, contact your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales represen-
tative.

Product Reference Guide 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Programming Overview
The scanner’s programmable feature settings can be modified to accom-
modate your system’s unique requirements. These settings can be commu-
nicated to the scanner in one of three ways:
1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of host
commands are available. Refer to Appendix D for more details or
contact Tech Support.
2. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scan-
ner’s programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code
labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner’s features
and options.

When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the
scanner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to fac-
tory defaults.
NOTE

Programming via Handheld Device


The scanner can also accept programming via its auxilliary port using a
handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability
to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes
presented in this manual. Datalogic models QuickScan® 1000 and
QuickScan® 6000 support this functionality. Handheld data format
requirements (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in Appendix E of this
manual. Additionally the programmable feature, Auxiliary Port Mode,
must be set to “External Handheld Input” to allow operation.

42 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Programming Overview

What Is Programming Mode?


Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in
order to accept commands via programming bar code labels. When pro-
gramming using the bar code labels in this manual, the scanner is typically
placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label.
While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes ONLY the
special programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See
Appendix A for information about scanner indications while in Program-
ming Mode.

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode.


Use the bar code label below to enter and exit (‘switch” into and out of )
Programming Mode.

SWITCH LABEL

Product Reference Guide 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Programming Session
A typical programming session is conducted as follows:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming
Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner may
emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and the
scanner (top) green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scan-
ner remains in Programming Mode. Normal scanning functions are
disabled.
2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded to
make the desired changes. With few exceptions1, the scanner will
emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming bar code.

Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will
sound an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for fea-
tures invalid to the current interface. Only features supported by the
currently active interface will be implemented.
NOTE

If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner’s interface, all previ-
ous configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost.
NOTE

Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single


digits to set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scan-
ning the SWITCH bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before
completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to
exit Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature
you were trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned dur-
ing the session will take effect.

1. Some features, such as Minimum Label Length, require you to select the label’s length by scan-
ning a series of single-digit bar codes. A single ‘good read’ beep is sounded when scanning these
single digits in Programming Mode. Only the final required digit in the sequence will produce a tri-
ple beep when scanned, indicating a successfully programmed feature.

44 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Programming Overview

It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one fea-


ture at a time. Should you make a mistake in the programming
sequence, it can be difficult to discover where an error has been made
if several features are programmed at once. Additionally, it can be
NOTE confusing to determine which features may or may not have been suc-
cessfully set following such a session.

3. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit Pro-
gramming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon
exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return to its
usual state (on steady or off ).

The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following con-
ditions:
— the programming sequence has been completed or the
SWITCH bar code is scanned
— five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data
programmed during the current session will be ignored1, and
the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to
initiating the exited session.
— power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Pro-
gramming Mode, before scanning the SWITCH bar code,
will cause all new settings to be ignored. On power-up, the
scanner will return to previous settings.
4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know
if the original factory settings have been changed.

1. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will
operate on the default settings for the new interface.

Product Reference Guide 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Programming Sequence
To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained
in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the
feature being programmed (as shown in Table 5-1). There are three possi-
ble programming sequences:

If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that


interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a program-
ming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configura-
NOTE tion items to the factory default for that interface type.)

A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) demon-


strates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the follow-
ing:
1. Place the scanner in Programming Mode (SWITCH bar
code).
2. Scan the Item Tag1 that will enable the new feature.
3. End the programming session and reset the scanner
(SWITCH bar code).

B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requiring


the entry of a range value. Like sample A, the scanner is placed in
Programming Mode and an Item Tag1 is scanned. Then, a value
must be entered before ending the programming session. In the
example, three digits must be scanned from the number pad in
Appendix C. This type of format, requiring several bar codes, is nec-
essary to allow flexible programming for item values with larger
numeric ranges.

C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scanning


of a single, extended length bar code. This special programming bar
code contains all the data necessary to enter Programming Mode, set
the Item Tag1 and Item Value, and exit Programming Mode (all in
one step).

1. An “Item Tag” is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming
bar code, that toggles (selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature.

46 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Programming Overview

Table 5-1. Programming Sequence

SET ITEM TAG ITEM VALUE END/RESET

1 2 3
A SWITCH
ENABLE
NEW FEATURE SWITCH

1 2 345 6
0

B ENABLE NEW
FEATURE
USING THE
0

FOLLOWING
SWITCH SETTINGS... 8 SWITCH

C 1
ONE BAR CODE CONTAINS SWITCH + ITEM TAG + ITEM VALUE + SWITCH

Product Reference Guide 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


LED and Beeper Indicators
The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various
scanner functions.

If You Make a Mistake...


If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the
scanner’s settings or wish to reset the scanner’s configuration, use the
Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner’s configura-
tion to the factory settings. Scanning this label will also reset any changes
made during previous programming sessions.

Return to Factory Settings


Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured
at the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically
used to return the scanner to a “known” operating state when the present
programming status is not known, faulty, or suspect.

Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that
may have been programmed since the scanner’s installation.
CAUTION

DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar
code, as the bar code below automatically enters and exits Program-
ming Mode as a part of its function. If this bar code is scanned follow-
ing a SWITCH bar code, it will simply cause the scanner to exit
NOTE Programming Mode without making changes.

RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS

48 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


If You Make a Mistake...

Test Mode
Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing, or “demo” mode. This
special mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is
not sent out to the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code
to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS
terminal.
To return the scanner to normal function, scan the TEST MODE = DIS-
ABLE bar code below.

DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar
codes on this page.
Scanning the TEST MODE = DISABLE bar code sets the Double
NOTE Read Timeout to 600ms.

TEST MODE = DISABLE

TEST MODE = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Scanner Button Options


Allows configuration of the scanner (volume) button to different modes of
operation.
• Disable Scanner Button — Disables all button functions
• Enable Standard Functions — Enables volume, tone, and reset.
• Enable Reset Only — The button’s sole function will be to reset the
scanner.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = DISABLE SCANNER BUTTON

50 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Scanner Button Options — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = ENABLE STANDARD FUNCTIONS

SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = ENABLE RESET ONLY

Product Reference Guide 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Double Read Timeout
The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how
much time must pass before reading the same label again (e.g. two identi-
cal items in succession).
To set the Double Read Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Dou-


ble Read Timeout setting to a higher value.
NOTE

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 400ms

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 600ms

52 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Double Read Timeout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 800ms

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 1 SECOND

Product Reference Guide 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Laser Timeout
The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser
diodes (VLDs) off if the scanner is idle. Using this feature can prolong the
life of the VLDs.
To set the Laser Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

LASER TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES

54 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Laser Timeout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LASER TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES

LASER TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES

Product Reference Guide 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Motor Timeout
The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the
motor off when the scanner is not in use.

Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor. If you
set the motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout, the motor and the
laser will both shut off when the motor timeout expires.
NOTE

To set the Motor Timeout:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES

56 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Motor Timeout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES

Product Reference Guide 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Motor Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 30 MINUTES

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 60 MINUTES

58 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Label Gone Timeout


Specifies the amount of time that data segments are stored by the software
before being discarded if a label has not been successfully decoded during
the current “label in volume session,” which is defined as the time between
when the label gone time is first started until the label gone timer expires.
To set the Label Gone Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 50 mS

Product Reference Guide 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Label Gone Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 160 mS

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 250 mS

60 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Label Gone Timeout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 500 mS

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 1 Second

Product Reference Guide 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Auxiliary Port Mode
Selects the usage for the scanner’s optional auxilliary port. The choices
listed below are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a
time).
• Disabled — Port is inactive
• External Handheld Input — Supports Datalogic® handheld scan-
ners (QuickScan 1000, QuickScan 6000, PowerScan) as well as
other models such as the Symbol® HotShot. Call your dealer for
more information about supported devices.

Cable pinout information for the Auxiliary Port is provided in Appen-


dix B of this manual. A connected handheld scanner must be config-
ured to transmit data as outlined in Appendix E.
NOTE

• PIR/CT — PIR (Productivity Index Reporting) is a value-added


feature which allows the scanner to provide information to an exter-
nal computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT
(Checker Training) is also a value-added feature which allows the
scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more
ergonomic fashion
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

AUXILIARY PORT MODE = DISABLE

62 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Auxiliary Port Mode — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

AUXILIARY PORT MODE = EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT

AUXILIARY PORT MODE = PIR/CT

Product Reference Guide 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Auxiliary Port Baud Rate
Specifies the baud rate of the auxillary port when operating in PIR/CT
mode.

PIR/CT is a value-added feature which may not have been activated on


your model.
NOTE

To specify the Auxiliary Port Baud Rate:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the
immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

AUXILIARY PORT BAUD RATE = 1200

AUXILIARY PORT BAUD RATE = 2400

64 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600

Product Reference Guide 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400

66 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


General Scanner Features

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200

Product Reference Guide 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT)
When PIR/CT is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data
before being presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to
provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label
was to read. CT allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on
how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion.

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact


your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include
this advanced capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PIR/CT = DISABLE

PIR/CT = ENABLE

68 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indication Features

Indication Features

Green LED Idle State


This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner
is idle and ready to read a label. Options are:
• Off
• On dim
To set the LED Idle State:
1. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
2. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GREEN LED IDLE STATE = OFF

GREEN LED IDLE STATE = ON DIM

Product Reference Guide 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Power-up Beep Control
Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scan-
ner-active mode on power-up. Choices are:
• No beep
• One beep
• Three beeps
To set the Power-up Beep:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

POWER-UP BEEP = OFF

POWER-UP BEEP = ONE BEEP

70 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indication Features

Good Read Beep Control


This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a
label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP = DISABLE

GOOD READ BEEP = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Good Read Beep Frequency
Adjusts the scanner’s good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high fre-
quency (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).
• Low = 660 Hz
• Medium = 860 Hz
• High = 1050 Hz
To set the Good Read Beep Frequency:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = LOW

72 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indication Features

Good Read Beep Frequency — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = MEDIUM

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = HIGH

Product Reference Guide 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Good Read Beep Length
Specifies the duration of a good read beep.
To set the good read beep length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired good read beep length setting. The selectable
range is 1-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments.
Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield
a three-digit entry (001-255).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH

74 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indication Features

Good Read Beep Volume


Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable
volumes, with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels
to the previous level:
• 0 = Lowest Volume
• 1 = Medium-Low Volume
• 2 = Medium Volume
• 3 = Highest Volume
To set the Good Read Beep Volume:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following pages.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = LOWEST

Product Reference Guide 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Good Read Beep Volume — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM LOW

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM

76 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indication Features

Good Read Beep Volume — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = HIGHEST

Product Reference Guide 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Good Read When to Indicate
This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/
or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.
• Good Read = Indicate after decode
• Good Read = Indicate after transmit
• Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active

The “Indicate after CTS goes inactive...” mode applies to RS-232 STD
and RS-232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in other interfaces,
“Indicate after decode” mode will be implemented.
NOTE

To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER DECODE

78 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indication Features

Good Read When to Indicate — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER TRANSMIT

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER CTS GOES INACTIVE, THEN ACTIVE


(RS-232 ONLY)

Product Reference Guide 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAS Features

EAS Active State


Specifies the active state polarity of EAS (Electronic Article Survellance);
the inactive state is its opposite polarity. EAS output goes active during the
good read indication of a bar code, allowing the EAS device to deactivate a
tag on the product.
To set the EAS Active State:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE LOW

EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE HIGH

80 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAS Features

EAS Timeout
Specifies the amount of time that an EAS (Electronic Article Survellance)
signal is held in its active state for a good read indication.
To set the EAS Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2.Scan the bar code, SET EAS TIMEOUT below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3.Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired EAS Timeout duration. The selectable range
is 0-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad
all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a
three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
000 = EAS timeout disabled
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)

A setting of 0 (000) disables this feature.

NOTE
4.Scan the SWITCH bar code to exit Programming Mode.

SET EAS TIMEOUT

Product Reference Guide 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Interface Type
Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are:

INTERFACE (I/F) TYPE I/F I.D. NUMBER INTERFACE (I/F) TYPE I/F I.D. NUMBER
RS-232 Standard 05 Keyboard Wedge A 25
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf 12 Keyboard Wedge B 26
RS-232 Single Cable 20 Keyboard Wedge C 27
USB-OEM 45 Keyboard Wedge D 28
IBM Port 17 04 Keyboard Wedge E 29
IBM Port 5B 08 Keyboard Wedge F 2A
IBM Port 9B 23 Keyboard Wedge G 31
USB Keyboard 35 Keyboard Wedge H 32
Keyboard Wedge I 33
NOT USER-SELECTABLE Keyboard Wedge J 34
Null Interface

82 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Interface Type — continued


A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null
Interface (no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at
installation. In this case, the correct Interface Type programming bar
code must be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS
NOTE system.

If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that


interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a program-
ming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configura-
NOTE tion items to the factory default for that interface type.)

To select the desired interface:

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the factory configu-


ration for that interface as the selection is made, erasing any and all
custom configuration that may have previously been done.
NOTE

1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.


2. Scan the SWITCH bar code
3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on
the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes adja-
cent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Type — continued
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to pro-
ceed to the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters
and options for that interface. For example, if RS-232 is selected, turn
to the pages in this manual headed as features specific to the RS-232
NOTE interface.

5. Connect new interface cable(s).

84 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

RS-232 Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 STANDARD

Product Reference Guide 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 WINCOR-NIXDORF

86 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal


(host) port.
NOTE

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 SINGLE CABLE

Product Reference Guide 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


USB-OEM Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host)


port.
NOTE

INTERFACE TYPE = USB-OEM

88 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

IBM Port 17 Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal


(host) port.
NOTE

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 17

Product Reference Guide 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Port 5B Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 5B

90 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

IBM Port 9B Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 9B

Product Reference Guide 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


USB Keyboard Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = USB KEYBOARD

92 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Keyboard Wedge A Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE A

Product Reference Guide 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge B Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE B

94 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Keyboard Wedge C Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE C

Product Reference Guide 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge D Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE D

96 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Keyboard Wedge E Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE E

Product Reference Guide 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge F Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE F

98 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Keyboard Wedge G Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE G

Product Reference Guide 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge H Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE H

100 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Keyboard Wedge I Interface Selection


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE I

Product Reference Guide 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge J Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since
you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempt-
ing to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface
selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE J

102 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length


Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages
transmitted to the host.
To set the Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MES-
SAGE LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length. The
selectable range is 0-249 data characters. (Labels that are longer than
this length are not read.) Pad all single and double digit numbers
with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-249).

If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length


limit imposed on data being transmitted to the host.
NOTE

4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the


appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Number of Host Transmission Buffers
Specifies the number of host transmission(s) that may be buffered. By
buffering data from a bar code, the scanner can continue to read a new bar
code while the old one is being transmitted to the host. Selecting BUF-
FERS = 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new
one can be read. A selection of BUFFERS = 2 means that a new bar code
can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted. When the
feature, Good Read Beep Control, is enabled, the scanner will beep when
the data is placed in a transmission buffer.
When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host, the
scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered.
To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 1

NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 2

104 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

AIM ID
AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself
as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM
label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent)

SYMBOLOGY CHAR SYMBOLOGY CHAR

UPC/EAN E MSI/Plessey M

Code 39 A PDF 417 L

DataBar Omnidirectional,
Codabar F e
DataBar Expanded (RSS)

Interleaved.2 of 5 I Standard 2 of 5 S

Code 93 G ISBN Xa

Code 128/EAN 128 C


a. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 5-1. AIM ID


SCANNER

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID

Product Reference Guide 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AIM ID — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

AIM ID: DISABLE

AIM ID: ENABLE

106 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Label ID Control
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to two ASCII characters (00-FF),
used to identify a bar code (symbology) type, available for all except IBM
interfaces. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted bar
code data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature pro-
vides options for configuring custom Label IDs individually per symbol-
ogy. If you wish to program the scanner to always include an industry
standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see the previous fea-
ture, AIM ID.
To configure a Label ID:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE or AFTER by scanning
the appropriate bar code.
3. Turn to the Symbology Programming section, locate and scan the
appropriate bar code to select the symbology for which you wish to
configure a custom Label ID, for example: Code 39 Label ID.
4. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose either one or
two) which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology.
Next, turn to the ASCII Character Set on the inside back cover of
this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your
choice of Label ID. For example, if you wish to select an equal sign
(=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associated hex characters as
3D.
5. Turn to Appendix C and scan the bar codes representing the hex
characters determined in the previous step. For the example given,
the characters ‘3’ and ‘D’ would be scanned to select an equal sign
(=). If a two-character Label ID is desired, for example an equal sign
and the letter C (=C), scan ‘3’, ‘D’, ‘4’ and ‘3’ to select them.
6. Scan the SWITCH bar code to exit Label ID entry.
7. Scan the SWITCH bar code once again to exit programming mode.

Product Reference Guide 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Figure 5-2. Label ID Position Options
SCANNER

Prefix Label ID Aim ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

OR

Label ID Control — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: DISABLE

LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: BEFORE BAR CODE DATA

108 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Label ID Control — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: AFTER BAR CODE DATA

Product Reference Guide 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Global Prefix
This feature specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label trans-
mission.
To specify the Global Prefix Character(s):
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GLOBAL PREFIX below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix
C that represent the hex designation for the desired character(s). A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated.

To specify “no Global Prefix,” scan 00.

NOTE

4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically


exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits
have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can
end the programming sequence early by scanning the TERMINATE
SEQUENCE bar code.
5. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

110 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Global Prefix — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SET GLOBAL PREFIX

TERMINATE SEQUENCE

Product Reference Guide 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Global Suffix
This feature specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label transmis-
sion. Three standard options are available below. Contact your dealer for
other alternate settings for this feature.
• No Global Suffix
• CR — Carriage Return
• CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed
To set the Global Suffix:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GLOBAL SUFFIX = NO GLOBAL SUFFIX

112 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Global Suffix — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR

GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR LF

Product Reference Guide 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Case Conversion
Changes the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.
Choices are:
• No case conversion
• Upper case
• Lower case
To configure this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the case conversion bar codes below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CASE CONVERSION = NO CASE CONVERSION

114 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interface Related Features

Case Conversion — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CASE CONVERSION = UPPER CASE

CASE CONVERSION = LOWER CASE

Product Reference Guide 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Features
IBM Interface Options
IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices.

The USB-OEM interface provides its own set of options. Refer to the feature,
USB-OEM Scanner Device Type, in this chapter.
NOTE

Options for this feature are as follows:


• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner configuration host
commands.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner — Ignores all scanner
configuration host commands.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT

IBM INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER

116 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Features

IBM Number of Host Resets


Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the scanner
starts a five-second period during which a user is allowed to enter label-
programming mode and configure the scanner.
To set the number of host resets:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired number of host resets. The selectable range is 1-15
resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to
yield a three-digit entry (001-015).
Examples:
001 = 1 reset
005 = 5 resets
011= 11 resets
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS

Product Reference Guide 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
This feature enables/disables scanner's ability to set a symbology identifier
for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an
IBM host. This applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port
5B; Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B.

When enabled, this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17.

NOTE

To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = DISABLE

IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = ENABLE

118 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Features

IBM Label Slicing Control


Enables/disables the slicing of IBM-46XX host transmission data into
multiple pieces when a label is longer than the length specified by IBM
Maximum Label Slice Length.
Options are:
• Disable Label Slicing — Send data to host in one piece.
• Enable Label Slicing — Slice the host data into multiple pieces
when necessary.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL = DISABLE LABEL SLICING

IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL = ENABLE LABEL SLICING

Product Reference Guide 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Maximum Label Slice Length
Specifies the maximum allowable length of host transmit data in each
sliced frame.

This setting only applies when IBM Label Slicing Control is


enabled.
NOTE

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.


2. Scan the bar code below, SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE
LENGTH. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired slice length. The selectable range is a length from
14 to 246. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading
zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (014-100).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE LENGTH

120 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IBM Features

USB-OEM Scanner Device Type


The IBM-USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of
two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scan-
ners you may already have connected to a USB POS, you may need to
change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate. Options are:
• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

USB-OEM SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = TABLE TOP SCANNER

USB-OEM SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = HANDHELD SCANNER

Product Reference Guide 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Baud Rate


This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data.

Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to


19200. They cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 and up.
NOTE

To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the
immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 1200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 2400

122 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Baud Rate — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600

Product Reference Guide 123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400

124 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Baud Rate — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200

Product Reference Guide 125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Number of Data Bits
Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data.

8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configura-
tion.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 7

RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 8

126 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Number of Stop Bits


Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data.

8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configura-
tion.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 1

RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 2

Product Reference Guide 127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Parity
Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data.

8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configura-
tion.
NOTE

Options for this setting are:


• RS-232 PARITY = NONE
• RS-232 PARITY = EVEN
• RS-232 PARITY = ODD
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the
desired Parity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as
well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 PARITY = NONE

128 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Parity — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 PARITY = EVEN

RS-232 PARITY = ODD

Product Reference Guide 129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Hardware Control
Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or
scan control.
Options are:
• Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any activ-
ity on the CTS line.
• Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmission
of data to the host.
• Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for scan-
ner to read and transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive, scan-
ner remains in a host- disabled state; following a successful label
transmission, the CTS signal must transition to inactive and then to
active to enable scanning for the next label.
• Enable Magellan SL CTS scan control — Emulates default Magel-
lan SL setting for this feature.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired set-
ting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = DISABLE

130 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Hardware Control — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS FLOW CONTROL

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL

Product Reference Guide 131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Hardware Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE MGL SL CTS SCAN CONTROL

132 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Intercharacter Delay


Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the
next in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER
DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the
delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit
numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY

Product Reference Guide 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Software Flow Control
Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters. .

This item will be ignored when the feature, RS-232 NAK Character,
is enabled
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = DISABLE

RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = ENABLE

134 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Host Echo


When enabled, this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host
as it comes in. This feature is used for applications where “daisy chaining”
of RS-232 devices onto the same cable is necessary. If, for example, one of
the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while
another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmis-
sion to the host, the scanner will wait for the RS-232 channel to be quiet
for a specified period of time (set via RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval).
The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in
order to avoid RS-232 transmission conflicts.

When RS-232 Host Echo is enabled, the following features are ignored:
RS-232 Software Flow Control and RS-232 ACK NAK Enable
as well as all other ACK/ NAK related operations, plus processing of
RS-232 host commands.
NOTE

To enable/disable this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 HOST ECHO = DISABLE

RS-232 HOST ECHO = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval
This setting specifies the time interval of RS-232 channel inactivity which
must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit
the bar code data that has just been scanned to the host.
• 0 - 100 = Time in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET
INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0-100, which is
the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double
digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-
100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL

136 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Ignore Host Commands


When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host com-
mands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active,
and transmit labels. For normal operation of the interface, disable this
feature.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS =


NORMAL (DO NOT IGNORE HOST COMMANDS)

RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 TTL
Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output
pins TxD and RTS.
Choices are:
• Normal RS-232 levels
• TTL levels
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this
feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 LEVELS = NORMAL RS-232

RS-232 LEVELS = TTL

138 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 TTL Invert


Enables/disables inversion of TTL.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this
feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 TTL INVERT = NO INVERT

RS-232 TTL INVERT = INVERT

Product Reference Guide 139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to delay a DC1 response for 40
milliseconds.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this
feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 ICL DC1 CHARACTER DELAY = DISABLE

RS-232 ICL DC1 CHARACTER DELAY = ENABLE

140 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL


Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on
receiving an ASCII BEL (07 hex).
• Disable
• Enable
To enable/disable this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = DISABLE

RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Beep on Not on File
Select for the host to beep (or not) when a not-on-file condition is
detected by the host. This feature is also applicable to single cable RS-232.

RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = DISABLE

RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = ENABLE

142 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 ACK NAK Enable


This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232
ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an
“ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is
in error. Selections for this option are:
• Disable
• Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK response
from the host when a label is sent)
• Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the scan-
ner will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command)
• Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host
Commands
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following
page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 ACK NAK = DISABLE

RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL TRANSMISSION

Product Reference Guide 143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 ACK NAK Enable — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 ACK/NAK = HOST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL & HOST

144 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 ACK Character


This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK char-
acter.

DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as


XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal opera-
tion of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature,
RS-232 Number of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.
NOTE

To specify the RS-232 ACK Character:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the hex designation for the desired character. A table contain-
ing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is
available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters
must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the
desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired ACK
character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corre-
sponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER

Product Reference Guide 145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 NAK Character
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK char-
acter.

DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as


XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal opera-
tion of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature,
RS-232 Number of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.
NOTE

To specify the RS-232 NAK Character:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the hex designation for the desired character. A table contain-
ing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is
available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters
must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the
desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired NAK
character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corre-
sponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.

SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER

146 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout


This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS-
232 ACK NAK Timeout Value.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = DISABLE

RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value
This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character
from the host following a label transmission.
• 0 = Infinite timeout
• 1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments
To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT
VALUE. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite time-
out. The remaining selectable range is 1-75, which is the timeout in
200-millisecond increments. Pad all single digit numbers with lead-
ing zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-075).
Examples:
000 = Infinite timeout
001 = 200ms
005 = 1,000ms (1 second)
040 = 8,000ms (8 seconds)
075 = 15,000ms (15 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE

148 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count


This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label trans-
mission under a retry condition.
To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-255 resets. Pad
all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a
three-digit entry (000-255).

A setting of 255 specifies “retry forever.”

NOTE

4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the


appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT

Product Reference Guide 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling
This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors
detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors
include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as
parity or framing errors.
• Ignore Errors (recommended setting)
• Assume ACK (risk of lost label data)
• Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label)
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = IGNORE ERRORS

150 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Features

RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME ACK

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME NAK

Product Reference Guide 151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure
Enables/disables an audible error indication upon a transmission failure.

RS-232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE = DISABLE

RS-232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE = ENABLE

152 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Options

Single Cable RS-232 Options


The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options
with other RS-232 interfaces. Rather than repeat them in this chapter as
Single Cable options, please find them referenced as follows:
• RS-232 Baud Rate on page 122
• RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 126
• RS-232 Number of Stop Bits on page 127
• RS-232 Parity on page 128
• RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 134
• RS-232 Beep on Not on File on page 142
• RS-232 Beep on Not on File on page 142

Product Reference Guide 153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable
Enables/disables the scanner’s ability to send Pacesetter Plus information
as trailers to UPC/EAN label data.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE PACESETTER PLUS = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE PACESETTER PLUS = ENABLE

154 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Options

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection


Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is con-
trolled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be
asserted during label transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the con-
figuration values state, to determine when to send label data.
Choices are:
• Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored
• Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored
• Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS
• Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the
desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as
facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 0

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 1

Product Reference Guide 155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 2

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 3

156 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Options

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 4

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 5

Product Reference Guide 157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = ENABLE

158 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Options

Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK


Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Use STX
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = ENABLE

160 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Single Cable RS-232 Options

Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character


This feature selects the STX character.
To specify the STX Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARAC-
TER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix
C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each
character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit
entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes
containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable
range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER

Product Reference Guide 161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character
Allows selection of the ETX character.
To specify the ETX Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARAC-
TER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix
C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each
character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit
entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes
containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable
range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER

162 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features


Features listed in this section apply to both the Keyboard Wedge and USB
Keyboard interfaces unless otherwise noted.

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout


This feature specifies the country/language to be supported by the key-
board.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the appropriate country bar code from the following pages.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on that and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = USA

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = BELGIUM

Product Reference Guide 163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

³ 0 3 LAYOUT
KEYBOARD 0 2 0= BRITAIN
2

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = DENMARK

164 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = FRANCE

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = GERMANY

Product Reference Guide 165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = ITALY

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = NORWAY

166 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = PORTUGAL

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SPAIN

Product Reference Guide 167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SWEDEN

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SWITZERLAND

168 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = JAPANESE 106 KEY

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = HUNGARY

Product Reference Guide 169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = CZECH

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SLOVAKIA

170 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = ROMANIA

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = CROATIA

Product Reference Guide 171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = POLAND

Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval


Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner
breaks keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host.
To set the Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET
INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 1-100, which is the
interval duration in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and
double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(001-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET INTERVAL

172 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State


Specifies the format in which the scanner sends character data..
Choices are:
• CAPS LOCK OFF — send character data in normal format.
• CAPS LOCK ON — send character data in reverse case.
• SHIFT LOCK ON — send character data in shifted case. This
option only applies to Wedge G. For other interface this setting
results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality.
• CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE — This only applies to
the USB Keyboard Interface. For other interfaces, this setting results
in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CAPS LOCK STATE = OFF

CAPS LOCK STATE = CAPS LOCK ON

Product Reference Guide 173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CAPS LOCK STATE = SHIFT LOCK ON

CAPS LOCK STATE = CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE

174 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation


Enables/disables ability of scanner to perform host communications nor-
mally performed by attached keyboard.

This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface.

NOTE

All PCs check the keyboard status during the power-on Selftest. It is rec-
ommended that you enable this function if you are working without a
keyboard installation. It simulates keyboard timing and passes the key-
board status to the PC during power-on.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

KEYBOARD SIMULATION = DISABLE

KEYBOARD SIMULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Control Characters
Specifies how the scanner transmits ASCII control characters to the host.

This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface.

NOTE

Choices are:
• Disable Control Characters
• Enable transmission of control characters to host
• Send characters between 00H and 1FH according to a special func-
tion-key mapping table. (This is used to send keys that are not in
the normal ASCII set; a unique set is provided for each available
scancode set. Reference Appendix F, Keyboard Function Key Map-
pings.)
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your choice from the Control Characters feature bar codes
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CONTROL CHARACTERS = DISABLE

176 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Keyboard Interface — Control Characters — contin-


ued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CONTROL CHARACTERS = ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF CTL CHARACTERS

CONTROL CHARACTERS = ENABLE FUNCTION KEY MAPPING

Product Reference Guide 177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay
Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the
next, in 10 millisecond increments.
To specify the intercharacter delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHAR-
ACTER DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the
delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit
numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY

178 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symbology Programming

Symbology Programming
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that
interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a pro-
gramming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other
configuration items — including symbology programming — to the
NOTE factory default for that interface type.)

Coupon Control
Used to control the method of processing coupon labels.
Options are:
• Disable coupon decoding
• Enable UPC/EAN coupon decoding
• Enable RSS coupon decoding
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

COUPON CONTROL = DISABLE

Product Reference Guide 179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Coupon Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

COUPON CONTROL = ENABLE UPC/EAN COUPON DECODING

COUPON CONTROL = ENABLE DATABAR COUPON DECODING

180 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Enable

UPC-A Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-A = DISABLE

UPC-A = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character.

This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function.

NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

182 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

184 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Enable

UPC-A Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label


ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

186 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Enable

UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies a UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

188 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Enable

UPC-A Minimum Reads


Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-A label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 1

UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 2

Product Reference Guide 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 3

UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 4

190 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Enable

UPC-E Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-E = DISABLE

UPC-E = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

192 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Enable

UPC-E Check Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = ENABLE

194 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Enable

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13


Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E LABEL ID

196 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Enable

UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies a UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

198 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Enable

UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies a UPC-E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-E label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 1

UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 2

200 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E Enable

UPC-E Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 3

UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 = DISABLE

EAN-13 = ENABLE

202 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Enable

EAN-13 First Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

204 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Enable

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable


Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to
Bookland ISBN labels.

If any add-on information is present on the label prior to the conver-


sion to ISBN, the add-on data will be discarded. Only the base label will
be converted.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion= DISABLE

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN 13 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 13 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN 13 LABEL ID

206 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Enable

EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies an EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

208 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Enable

EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies an EAN-13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
= DISABLE below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE

Product Reference Guide 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN-13 label
must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 1

EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 2

210 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13 Enable

EAN-13 Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 3

EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Bookland Label ID
This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID

212 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8 = DISABLE

EAN-8 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

214 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13


Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion
Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to insert a guard pattern into
an otherwise complete EAN-8 segment it has received.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD INSERTION = DISABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD INSERTION = ENABLE

216 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution


Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to substitute a guard pattern for
even-parity 6 when an EAN-8/JAN-8 label is presented.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION = DISABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to find an EAN/JAN8 guard
pattern in cases where the EAN/JAN8 margin makes the guard look like a
character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8/JAN-8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION = DISABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION = ENABLE

218 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves


When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact EAN-8
label haves with no overlapping characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

EAN-8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves
When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two EAN-8
label halves together that may contain differing characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8 STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

EAN-8 STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

220 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN 8 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 8 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN 8 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

222 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies an EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

224 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Decoding Levels


Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four
selectable levels:
• Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eleminates mis-
reads. The most secure setting.
• Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet
minimizes misreads.
• Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggres-
sive.
• Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive.

Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for
this feature allow a higher potential for misreads.
CAUTION

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following
pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “Slightly
More Aggressive” setting. For default settings for other features, see
Appendix E.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE

226 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE

Product Reference Guide 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN-8 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 1

EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 2

228 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 3

EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length
Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in an EAN-8/
JAN-8 label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decod-
ing. Selectable from 5 to 15 characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 5 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 6 CHARACTERS

230 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 7 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 8 CHARACTERS

Product Reference Guide 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 9 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 10 CHARACTERS

232 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 11 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 12 CHARACTERS

Product Reference Guide 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 13 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 14 CHARACTERS

234 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8 Enable

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 15 CHARACTERS

Product Reference Guide 235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options
The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC/EAN sym-
bologies:
• Price Weight Check
• In-Store Label Minimum Reads
• Enable EAN Two Label
• EAN Two Label Minimum Reads
• Addons

236 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

Price Weight Check


Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
Applies to all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible1 Number Sys-
tem/First Character digits.
Options are:
• Disable
• 4-digit price/weight
• 5-digit price/weight
• 4-digit European price/weight
• 5-digit European price/weight
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = DISABLE

1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN/
JAN-13 labels with a First Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the
six types. Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled.

Product Reference Guide 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Price Weight Check — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT

238 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

Price Weight Check — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT

Product Reference Guide 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


In-Store Label Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an In-Store1 label
must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 1

IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 2

1. Instore labels are defined as UPC-A labels with a number-system character of 2 or 4 as well as
EAN-8 and EAN-13 labels with a Flag1 character of 2 or an EAN-13 label starting with the three
characters '980'.

240 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

In-Store Label Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 3

IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Enable EAN Two Label
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this
feature.

EAN TWO LABEL = DISABLE

EAN TWO LABEL = ENABLE

242 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

EAN Two Label Combined Transmission


Enables/disables the transmitting of an EAN two label pair as one label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this
feature.

EAN TWO LABEL COMBINED TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN TWO LABEL COMBINED TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Guard Insertion
Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to insert either a missing lead-
ing or trailing guard on an otherwise complete UPC-A/EAN-13 segment
it has received.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC/EAN GUARD INSERTION = DISABLE

UPC/EAN GUARD INSERTION = ENABLE

244 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves


When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact UPC-A /
EAN-13 label haves with no overlapping characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC/EAN STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

UPC/EAN STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves
When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two UPC-A /
EAN-13 label halves together that may contain differing characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC/EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

UPC/EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

246 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction


Enables/Disables character reconstruction on UPC/EAN labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC/EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION = DISABLE

UPC/EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN Two Label Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN Two Label
bar code must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 1

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 2

248 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

EAN Two Label Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 3

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for UPC/EAN.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

UPC/EAN CORRELATION = DISABLE

UPC/EAN CORRELATION = ENABLE

250 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length


Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in a UPC/EAN/
JAN label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decoding.
Selectable from 5 to 15 characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 5 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 6 CHARACTERS

Product Reference Guide 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 7 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 8 CHARACTERS

252 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 9 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 10 CHARACTERS

Product Reference Guide 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 11 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 12 CHARACTERS

254 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 13 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 14 CHARACTERS

Product Reference Guide 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 15 CHARACTERS

256 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

Addons
Add-ons (or supplemental characters) are commonly added to the end of
UPC/EAN bar codes. The scanner will read the add-ons if they are
enabled and in the field of view. Three add-on types are supported: 2-
digit, 5-digit and Code 128 add-ons. Supported options are:
None. This option directs the scanner to ignore add-on portion of a
UPC/EAN bar code but still read the main portion of the bar code.
2 Digits. The scanner will optionally read 2-digit add-ons with the UPC/
EAN label.
5 Digits. The scanner will optionally read 5-digit add-ons with the UPC/
EAN label.
Code 128 Add-on. The scanner will optionally read Code 128 add-ons
with the UPC/EAN label.

Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of


optional and conditional add-ons.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the
following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Product Reference Guide 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Addons — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT ADD-ONS = DISABLE

OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT ADD-ONS = ENABLE

258 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

Addons — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

OPTIONAL 5-DIGIT ADD-ONS = DISABLE

OPTIONAL 5-DIGIT ADD-ONS = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Addons — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

OPTIONAL CODE 128 ADD-ONS = DISABLE

OPTIONAL CODE 128 ADD-ONS = ENABLE

260 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

Addon Timer
When addons have been selected as optional, this feature sets the duration
of time that the scanner can unsuccessfully look for an addon before pro-
ceeding to read a bar code. Timer duration is specified in 10ms incre-
ments.
To set the Addon Timer:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET ADDON TIMER DURATION below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Addon Timer Duration. The selectable range is 1-
10, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all sin-
gle and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-
digit entry (001-010).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
003 = 30ms
008 = 80ms
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

SET ADDON TIMER DURATION

Product Reference Guide 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of times a 2-digit addon must be read
before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1

2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2

262 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3

2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of times a 5-digit addon must be read
before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2

264 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of times a Code 128 addon must be read
before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1

CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2

266 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Other UPC/EAN Options

Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GTIN Enable
Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and
EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.

If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion


taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted
GTIN bar code.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GTIN = DISABLE

GTIN = ENABLE

268 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GTIN Enable

GTIN Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID


is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scan-
ner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 2-digit supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID


is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

270 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GTIN Enable

GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID


This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 5-digit supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID


is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID


is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

272 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Omnidirectional Enable

DataBar Omnidirectional Enable


Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Omnidirec-
tional labels.

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact


your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include
this advanced capability.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

DataBar Omnidirectional = DISABLE

DataBar Omnidirectional = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation
Enables/disables the ability of DataBar Omnidirectional to be transmitted
as EAN-128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE

274 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Omnidirectional Enable

DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID


This feature specifies an DataBar Omnidirectional label ID to be added to
bar code data.
To set this feature:

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar Omnidi-
rectional label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 1

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 2

276 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Omnidirectional Enable

DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads — contin-


ued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 3

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Expanded
labels.

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact


your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include
this advanced capability.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

DataBar Expanded = DISABLE

DataBar Expanded = ENABLE

278 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Enable

DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation


Enables/disables EAN-128 emulation for DataBar Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

DataBar Expanded/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE

DataBar Expanded/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Label ID
This feature specifies an DataBar Expanded label ID to be added to bar
code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID

280 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Enable

DataBar Expanded Length Control


This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for
DataBar Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set the features DataBar Expanded Length 1 and
DataBar Expanded Length 2.
NOTE

DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see DataBar Expanded Length
Control). Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
01 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (01-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1

282 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Enable

DataBar Expanded Length 2


Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see DataBar Expanded
Length Control). Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 01 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero
to yield a two-digit entry (01-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar
Expanded label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 1

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 2

284 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DataBar Expanded Enable

DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 3

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 = DISABLE

CODE 39 = ENABLE

286 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

This feature applies only when Code 39 Check Character Calcula-


tion is enabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check
character. When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data
character.

If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread


can occur.
In particular, if you are using variable length stitching, it is important to
NOTE use check character calculation to prevent misreads.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

288 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Check Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Full ASCII
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full
ASCII labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 FULL ASCII = DISABLE

CODE 39 FULL ASCII = ENABLE

290 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Require Quiet Zones
When enabled, this feature requires that quiet zones (margins) be present
for Code 39 labels. When disabled, quiet zones are optional.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = DISABLE

CODE 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = ENABLE

292 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Length Control


This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
You must now set the features Code 39 Length 1 and Code 39
Length 2.
When using variable length stitching, it is important to enable Code
NOTE 39 Check Character Calculation to prevent misreads.

CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 293

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 39 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1

294 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 39 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired fixed label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this
length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 295

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 39 CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CORRELATION = ENABLE

296 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 39 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 39 STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 297

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 39 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 1

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 2

298 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39 Enable

Code 39 Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 299

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pharmacode 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode
39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 = ENABLE

300 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pharmacode 39 Enable

Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission


Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode
39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 301

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

302 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pharmacode 39 Enable

Pharmacode 39 Label ID
This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code
data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 303

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Enable
Enables/disables1 the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 128 = DISABLE

CODE 128 = ENABLE

1. Exception: The Code 128 symbology is always enabled with regard to scanning/reading the spe-
cial C128 programming bar codes provided in this manual.

304 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Enable

Code 128 Transmit Function Characters


Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3,
and 4.

Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces.

NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = DISABLE

CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 305

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Convert Code 128 to Code 39
Enables/disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = DISABLE

CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = ENABLE

306 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Enable

Code 128 Label ID


This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 307

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set the features Code 128 Length 1 and Code 128
Length 2.
NOTE

CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

308 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Enable

Code 128 Length 1


Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 128 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 128 Length Con-
trol). Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero
to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 LENGTH 2

310 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Enable

Code 128 Correlation


This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 128 CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODE 128 CORRELATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 311

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 128 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 128 STITCHING = ENABLE

312 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Enable

Code 128 Minimum Reads


Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 128 label
must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 1

CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 2

Product Reference Guide 313

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 4

314 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-128 Enable

EAN-128 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN-128 labels.
When disabled, EAN128 labels are transmitted in Code128 data format.
When enabled, EAN128 labels are transmitted in EAN128 data format
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-128 = DISABLE

EAN-128 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-128 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-128 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-128 LABEL ID

316 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5
labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 OF 5 = DISABLE

I 2 OF 5 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 317

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2
of 5 check character.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a


misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code
are treated as data characters.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

318 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check char-
acter.

This feature applies only when I 2 of 5 Check Character Calcula-


tion is enabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 319

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


I 2 of 5 Label ID
This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID

320 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable

I 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for I 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set the features I 2 of 5 Length 1 and I 2 of 5 Length


2.
NOTE

I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 321

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


I 2 of 5 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see I 2 of 5 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1

322 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable

I 2 of 5 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see I 2 of 5 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers
with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 323

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


I 2 of 5 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for I 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

I 2 of 5 CORRELATION = DISABLE

I 2 of 5 CORRELATION = ENABLE

324 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable

I 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar
code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code
parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. I 2 of 5 Length 1


and/or I 2 of 5 Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to
work.
NOTE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 325

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an I 2 of 5 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 1

I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 2

326 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable

I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 3

I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 327

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5
labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 OF 5 = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 OF 5 = ENABLE

328 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation


Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of
5 check character.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a


misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code
are treated as data characters.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 329

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check charac-
ter.

This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Character


Calculation is enabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

330 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Label ID
This feature specifies a Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code
data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 331

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Standard 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 and Standard 2 of 5


Length 2.
NOTE

STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

332 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Standard 2 of 5 Length Con-
trol). Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 333

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Standard 2 of 5 Length
Control). Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with aleading zero to
yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2

334 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Standard 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CORRELATION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CORRELATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 335

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Stan-
dard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled,
the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data
will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. Standard


2 of 5 Length 1 and/or Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 must be properly con-
figured for stitching to work.
NOTE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE

336 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads


Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Standard 2 of 5
label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 1

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 2

Product Reference Guide 337

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 3

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 4

338 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR = DISABLE

CODABAR = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 339

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

340 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Start Stop Character Set


This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop charac-
ters.
Options are:
• ABCD/TN* E
• ABCD/ABCD
• abcd/tn* e
• abcd/abcd
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the
desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/TN* E

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/ABCD

Product Reference Guide 341

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Start Stop Character Set — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/tn* e

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/abcd

342 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Start Stop Character Match


Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = DISABLE

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 343

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check
character.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a


misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code
are treated as data characters.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

344 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Check Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character.

Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation is


enabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 345

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Label ID
This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR LABEL ID

346 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Require Quiet Zones


When enabled, this feature requires that quiet zones (margins) be present
for Codabar labels. When disabled, quiet zones are optional.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = DISABLE

CODABAR REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 347

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Codabar.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set the features Codabar Length 1 and Codabar
Length 2.
NOTE

CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

348 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Codabar Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with aleading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 349

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Codabar Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero
to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR LENGTH 2

350 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Codabar.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODABAR CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODABAR CORRELATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 351

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

Codabar Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. Codabar


Length 1 and/or Codabar Length 2 must be properly configured for
stitching to work.
NOTE

CODABAR STITCHING = DISABLE

CODABAR STITCHING = ENABLE

352 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Enable

Codabar Minimum Reads


Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Codabar label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 1

CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 2

Product Reference Guide 353

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Codabar Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 3

CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 4

354 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Enable

Code 93 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 93 = DISABLE

CODE 93 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 355

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 LABEL ID

356 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Enable

Code 93 Length Control


This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 93.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set the features Code 93 Length 1 and Code 93
Length 2.
NOTE

CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 357

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 93 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 LENGTH 1

358 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Enable

Code 93 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 93 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero
to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 359

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 93.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 93 CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODE 93 CORRELATION = ENABLE

360 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Enable

Code 93 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 93 labels. When parts of a Code 93
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 93 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 93 STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 361

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 93 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 1

CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 2

362 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93 Enable

Code 93 Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 363

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI/Plessey labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY = ENABLE

364 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable

MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation


Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI/Plessey
check characters.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a


misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code
are treated as data characters.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 365

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters
Specifies number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and
verified.

Check characters are always modulus 10.

NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/
Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 1

MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 2

366 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable

MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission


Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.

This feature applies only when MSI/Plessey Check Character


Calculation is enabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 367

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Label ID
This feature specifies an MSI/Plessey label ID to be added to bar code
data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the


Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID

368 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable

MSI/Plessey Length Control


This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for MSI/Plessey.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

You must now set the features MSI/Plessey Length 1 and MSI/
Plessey Length 2.
NOTE

MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 369

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see MSI/Plessey Length Con-
trol). Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 1 below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
04 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 1

370 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable

MSI/Plessey Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 93 Length Control).
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired label length. A setting of 00 will ignore this length
(only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this
option is 04 to 16. Pad all singledigit numbers with a leading zero to
yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 371

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for MSI/Plessey.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

MSI/PLESSEY CORRELATION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CORRELATION = ENABLE

372 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable

MSI/Plessey Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for MSI/Plessey labels. When parts of an MSI/
Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the
bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data
will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/Plessey Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. MSI/


Plessey Length 1 and/or MSI/Plessey Length 2 must be properly
configured for stitching to work.
NOTE

MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 373

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an MSI/Plessey label
must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 1

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 2

374 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MSI/Plessey Enable

MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads — continued


Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 3

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 4

Product Reference Guide 375

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTES

376 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix A
LED/Beeper Indications &
Controls
Figure A-1 shows the operator’s controls and indicators for both models.
The descriptions following identify the use or function of each compo-
nent.

Figure A-1. Scanner Controls and Indicators

Speaker

Scan Model 2200VS


Window
Volume/Tone
Indicator Push Button
LED plus Indicator LED
Volume/Tone Upper Scan Lower Scan
Push Button Window Window

Top Cover

Model 2300HS

Product Reference Guide 377

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Volume/Tone Push Button
The Volume/Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depend-
ing upon the duration of time it is pressed:

Volume changes made using the Volume/Tone Push Button are lost
when the scanner is powered-down and are reset to the configured set-
ting. If you wish to permanently change the volume, use the special
programming labels in the Product Reference Guide.
NOTE

Table A-1. Volume/Tone Push Button Functions

PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION

Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by:


Momentary (when Wakes scanner from Sleep
- Moving an object through the scan zone.
scanner is asleep) Mode
- Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner.

Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker


volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a
Momentary (when
Increments volume repeated press of the push button cycles volume back
scanner is awake)
to the lowest setting, then volume increases on subse-
quent press(es). Four volume levels are available.

Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds,


Hold, then release
then release. Each time this is done, the beeper will
when the beeper Increments tone
sound at one of three tones. Stop when the desired
sounds
tone (high, medium or low) is sounded.

This mode allows system support personnel to trouble-


shoot problems with the scanner and is used to deter-
4 Seconds Scanner Diagnostics Modea mine if it can read bar codes. Press the button for eight
seconds or cycle power to exit Scanner Diagnostics
Mode and reset the scanner.

8 Seconds Resets Scannerb Only system support personnel should perform a reset.

a. By standard default, this function is normally disabled to prevent accidental activation by users.
b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support person-
nel.

378 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Green LED Indicator
The green LED indicates scanner status as shown in the table below.

Table A-2. Green LED Indications

LED
DURATION COMMENT
INDICATION

Scanner Activea Scanner (Green) LED on steady and


The scanner is ready for operation. Scanning is
dim
immediately available.
(Normal Mode)

Good Read Scanner (Green) LED - bright flash


Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded.
Indicationa

Scanner (Green) LED - Continuous


Program Mode Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming
flashing
Indication Mode. Cycle power to exit Programming Mode.

The scanner motor and/or laser have automati-


Sleep Mode Scanner (Green) LED flashes slowly
cally switched off and the unit has entered Sleep
Indication
Mode due to extended inactivity.

Scanner (Green) LED 1-second off, 1/


Host Disabled 10-second on Host has disabled scanning.

Audible low tone 1 second. LED


Field Replace-
flashes continuously.
able Unit (FRU) Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has been
Warning (Error detected. Call systems support for service.
Mode)

Scanner (Green) LED flashes a


coded sequence in concert with the Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button push fol-
FRU Indication speaker. lowing a FRU warning. Enables service techni-
cians to identify FRU failures.

a. Certain functions of the LED is selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner may not be pro-
grammed to display all indications.

Product Reference Guide 379

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTES

380 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix B
Cable Information
Introduction
The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create
an auxilary port cable for use in interconnecting the scanner to an external
handheld scanner.

General Specifications
Wire Requirements
• Cable length should not exceed 15 feet.
• Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG).
• If run exceeds 15 feet, we recommend 26 AWG wire size.

Product Reference Guide 381

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Auxiliary Port
External Handheld Input
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position

Cable Pinout

Table B-1

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 DTR Data Terminal Ready

2 CTS in Clear To Send (input)

3 N/C No Connection - Reserved

4 RTS out Request To Send (output)

5 RxD in Receive Data (Input)

6 TxD out Transmit Data (output)

7 ~EAS_GOOD READ Special use Good Read

8 +5V out (500mA max) +5V out

9 GND Signal Ground

10 SPKR OUT Speaker Out

382 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix C
Keypad
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide 383

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

384 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide 385

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

386 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide 387

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

388 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide 389

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

390 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix D
Host Commands
Accepting Commands from an RS-232
Scanner Host
The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands:

COMMAND ASCII HEX COMMENT

Enable Scanner E 0x45

Disable Scanner D 0x44

Reset Scanner R 0x52

Not On File Indication F 0x46 Long series of beeps

Beep Good Read Tone B 0x42 Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled

Force Good Read Tone 0x01 Beeps regardless of beep setting

Bel 0x07 Force Good Read Tone

Identification request i 0x69 Returns long responsea

Health request h 0x68 Returns long responsea

Status request s 0x73 Returns long responsea


a. Call Tech Support for information.

If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the
steps indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is
also available. Contact Tech Support for more details.

Product Reference Guide 391

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTES

392 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix E
Handheld Data Format
Requirements
This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of
data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as
transmitted from a handheld scanner.

Handheld Data Format Requirements General


• 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity.
• RTS is used to "bracket" the data received from the handheld: RTS
must be asserted high during data transmission, and de-asserted
after label transmission is complete. No other flow control mecha-
nisms are required or supported. The de-assertion of the RTS signal
must occur no later than 50 milliseconds from the complete trans-
mission of the last character of the transmitted data.
• The time between character transmission can be no longer than 50
milliseconds.
• Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce length
requirements for validation of the label.
• Handheld scanner will be required to transmit start and stop charac-
ters for Codabar and Code 39 labels.
• Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if con-
figured) for validation of the label.
• Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e.
labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated).
• Standard Datalogic formats generally use a single prefix character.
The specific formats are provided below.

Product Reference Guide 393

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements
The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typi-
cally observed in factory configurations of Datalogic handheld scanners.

DataBar Omnidirectional
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Check character must be included in label
• Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and preceed the
base label
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
• Example: ‘R40101044123456789’

DataBar Expanded
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Check character must be included in label

UPC-A
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix
must be 13.
• Example: 'A060992011187'.

UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental


• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix
must be 15.
• Example: 'A06099201118712'.

394 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix
must be 18
• Example: 'A06099201118712345'

UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental


• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix
must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental codes are
variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'A0609920111878100000951'.

UPC-E
• System number must be included in label data
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix
must be 9
• Example: 'E09988750'

Product Reference Guide 395

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix
must be 11.
• Example: 'E0998875012'.

UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental


• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix
must be 14.
• Example: 'E0998875012345'.

UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental


• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix
must be greater or equal to 15 (code 128 Supplemental codes are
variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'E099887508101000951'.

396 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including pre-
fix must be 10
• Example: 'FF00210126'

EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including pre-
fix must be 12.
• Example: 'FF0021012612'.

EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including pre-
fix must be 15.
• Example: 'FF0021012612345'.

EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including pre-
fix must be greater than 16 (code 128 Supplemental codes are vari-
able length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'FF002101268102000951'.

Product Reference Guide 397

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


EAN-13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix
must be 14
• Example: 'F1101234567891'

EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect
• Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix
must be 16
• Example: 'F110123456789112'

EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix
must be 19.
• Example: 'F110123456789112345'.

EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect
• Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix
must be greater or equal to 20 (code 128 Supplemental codes are
variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters)
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'
• Example: 'F11012345678918100000951'

398 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and exclud-
ing prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main
scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology
type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '*'.
• Example : '**Code 39.TEST*'.

Code 39-Pharmacode
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and exclud-
ing prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main
scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology
type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'p'.
• Example: 'p*123456789*'.

I 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix charac-
ter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'i'.
• Example: 'i0123456789'.

Product Reference Guide 399

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix charac-
ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 's'.
• Example: 's0123456789'.

Codabar
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac-
ter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '%'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set
forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character
Match.
• Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and
must be included in the label.
• Example: '%s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the example
is a placeholder for the start stop character set).

400 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 128
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '#'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control
for this symbology type.
• Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value 8x.
Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows:
• x80 = function code 1
• x81 = function code 2
• x82 = function code 3
• x83 = function code 4
• For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general form
'#/82nnnnn/r ' - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage return.
• Example: '#Code_128.Test'.

MSI/Plessey
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac-
ter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '@'.
• Example: '@144769254'.

Code 93
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '&'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control
for this symbology type.
• Example: '&Code93-test'.

Product Reference Guide 401

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AIM Formats
AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label
data for transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC-A,
UPC-E and EAN-13 labels, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 will be received
from the handheld and transmitted to the POS by the scanner as EAN-13.
Using this form of identification, the ']' character must be the first charac-
ter in the label received from the handheld. Further identification of the
label is specified in the section below. The AIM identifiers on the received
label may or may not be transmitted to the POS and are controlled
according to the data formatting settings of the scanner.
The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what spe-
cific label characteristics can be supported.
If a label does not have one of the AIM identifiers specified below and the
first three characters of the label data fit the following qualifications:
• the first character is a ']'
• the second character is a capital letter or a small letter
• the third character is a digit
...then the label is transmitted to the host with the AIM identifier still
appended to the beginning of the label data.

UPC-A
• AIM does not specify UPC-A as a separate symbology using this
transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
• Example: ']E00060992011187'.

UPC-E
• AIM does not specify UPC-E as a separate symbology using this
transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
• Example: ']E00000000998875'.

EAN-13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.

402 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E0'- total length including prefix
must be 16.
• Example: ']E01101234567891'.

EAN-8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be cor-
rect.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E4' - total length including prefix
must be 11.
• Example: ']E400210126'.

2-Digit Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E1'.
• length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5. Total
required length is 21 for EAN-13 and 16 for EAN-8.
• Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA/UPCE/
EAN13 can be ]E0 or ]E3.
• If the main body prefix for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 is ]E0, then the
2-digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of ]E1.
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.

UPC-A 2-Digit addon ']E00060992011187]E112'

UPC-E 2-Digit addon ']E00000000998875]E112'

EAN-8 2-Digit addon ']E400210126]E112'

EAN-13 2-Digit addon ']E01101234567891]E112'

UPC-A ]E3006099201118712

UPC-E ]E3000000099887512

EAN-13 ]E3110123456789112

Product Reference Guide 403

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-Digit Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E2'.
• Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8. Total
required length is 24 for EAN-13 and 19 for EAN-8.
• Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA/UPCE/
EAN13 can be ]E0 or ]E3.
• If the main body prefix for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 is ]E0, then the
5-digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of ]E2.
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.

UPC-A 5-Digit addon ']E00060992011187]E212345'

UPC-E 5-Digit addon ']E00000000998875]E212345'

EAN-8 5-Digit addon ']E400210126]E212345'

EAN-13 5-Digit addon ']E01101234567891]E212345'

UPC-A ]E3006099201118712345

UPC-E ]E3000000099887512345

EAN-13 ]E3110123456789112345

404 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and exclud-
ing prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main
scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology
type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']A0' or ']A1'.
• Example: '*]A0Code 39.TEST*'.

Codabar
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac-
ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']F0'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set
forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character
Match.
• Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and
must be included in the label.
• Example: ']F0s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the example
is a placeholder for the start stop character set).

MSI/Plessey
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix charac-
ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']M0'.
• Example: ']M0144769254'.

Product Reference Guide 405

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code 93
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']G0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control
for this symbology type.
• Example : ']G0Code93-test'.

DataBar Omnidirectional
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
• Check character must be included in label.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters.
• Example: ']e001044123456789'.

DataBar Expanded
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character.
Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the scan-
ner.
• Example: ']e001900123456789083103001750'.

I 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix charac-
ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']I0', ']I1' or ']I2' (other prefixes
specify different check character properties which are not sup-
ported).
• Example: ']I10123456789'.

406 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Standard 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix charac-
ters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ']S0' (other prefixes specify dif-
ferent check character properties which are not supported).
• Example: ']S00123456789'.

Code 128 / EAN128


• Prefix must be either ASCII characters ']C0', ']C1' or ']C2'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control
for this symbology type.
• If EAN-128 Symbology is Enabled and prefix is ']C1', label will be
identified as an EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code 128.
• A prefix of ']C0' designates that no function code is present in the
1st or 2nd character position.
• A prefix of ']C2' designates that a function code 1 is present in the
2nd character.
• Example : ']C0Code_128.Test'.

Product Reference Guide 407

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTES

408 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix F
Keyboard Function Key
Mappings

Keyboard Model Cross Reference


Table F-410 summarizes the keyboard models, their defined protocol, scancode set, and some
unique features. The remaining tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated
with each of the scancode sets.

Product Reference Guide 409

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table F-1. Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Func.
Trans- Use
Scancode Key
Model Type I/F ID mission Country
Set Map
Protocol Mode
Support
PC/XT Foreign ALT Mode Wedge A PC/XT Scan Set 1 No No
AT; 
PS/2 25-286; 
PS/2 30-286; 
Wedge B AT/PS2 Scan Set 2 No No
PS/2 50, 50Z; 
PS/2 60,70,80,90,95
Foreign ALT Mode
PS/2 25 and 30 
Wedge C AT/PS2 Scan Set 1 No No
Foreign ALT Mode
PC/XT U.S. Mode Wedge D PC/XT Scan Set 1 Yes No
AT; 
PS/2 25-286; 
PS/2 30-286; 
PS/2 50, 50Z;  Wedge E AT/PS2 Scan Set 2 Yes Yes
PS/2 60,70,80,90,95
U.S. Mode + specific
country support
PS/2 25 and 30
Wedge F AT/PS2 Scan Set 1 Yes No
U.S. Mode
IBM 3xxx Terminals 
Wedge G AT/PS2 Scan Set 3 Yes No
(122-key keyboard)
IBM 3xxx Terminals
Wedge H AT/PS2 Scan Set 3 Yes No
(102-key keyboard)
PS55 5530T with Japanese
Wedge I AT/PS2 Yes No
JAPANESE DOS (TDOS) DOS
NEC
NEC 9801 Wedge J NEC 9801 Yes No
9801

410 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Table F-2. Scanset 1 Function Key Map

ASCII
ASCII code Key Scancode
(hex)
00 NUL ALT right Make E0h 38h
01 SOH ALT right Break E0h B8h
02 STX ALT left Make 38h
03 ETX ALT left Break B8h
04 EOT CTRL left Make 1Dh
05 ENQ CTRL left Break 9Dh
06 ACK CTRL right Make E0h 1Dh
07 BEL CTRL right Break E0h 9Dh
08 BS BS 0Eh
09 HT TAB right 0Fh
0A LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 4Dh + E0
0B VT TAB left 0Fh + S
0C FF Enter (inner keypad) 1Ch + E0
0D CR CR 1Ch
0E SO INSERT (inner keypad) 52h + E0
0F SI PAGE UP (inner keypad) 49h + E0
10 DLE PAGE DOWN (inner keypad) 51h + E0
11 DC1 HOME (inner keypad) 47h + E0
12 DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad) 4Bh + E0
13 DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 50h + E0
14 DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad) 48h + E0

Product Reference Guide 411

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table F-3. Scanset 2 Function Key Map

ASCII
ASCII code Key Scancode
(hex)
00 NUL ALT right Make E0h 11h
01 SOH ALT right Break E0h F0h 11h
02 STX ALT left Make 11h
03 ETX ALT left Break F0h 11h
04 EOT CTRL left Make 14h
05 ENQ CTRL left Break F0h 14h
06 ACK CTRL right Make E0h 14h
07 BEL CTRL right Break E0h F0h 14h
08 BS BS 66h
09 HT TAB right 0Dh
0A LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 74h + E0
0B VT TAB left 0Dh + S
0C FF Enter (right keypad) 5Ah + E0
0D CR CR 5Ah
0E SO INSERT (inner keypad) 70h + E0
0F SI PAGE UP (inner keypad) 7Dh + E0
10 DLE PAGE DOWN (inner keypad) 7Ah + E0
11 DC1 HOME (inner keypad) 6Ch + E0
12 DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad) 6Bh + E0
13 DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 72h + E0
14 DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad) 75h + E0
15 NAK F6 0Bh
16 SYN F1 05h
17 ETB F2 06h
18 CAN F3 04h
19 EM F4 0Ch
1A SUB F5 03h
1B ESC ESC 76h
1C FS F7 83h
1D GS F8 0Ah
1E RS F9 01h
1F US F10 09h

412 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Table F-4. Scanset 3, 102-Key Function Key Map

ASCII (hex) ASCII code Key Scancode


00 NUL ALT right Make 39h
01 SOH ALT right Break F0h 39h
02 STX ALT left Make 19h
03 ETX ALT left Break F0h 19h
04 EOT CTRL left Make 11h
05 ENQ CTRL left Break F0h 11h
06 ACK CTRL right Make 58h
07 BEL CTRL right Break F0h 58h
08 BS BS 66h
09 HT TAB right 0Dh
0A LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 6Ah
0B VT TAB left 0Dh + S
0C FF Enter (inner keypad) 79h
0D CR CR 5Ah
0E SO INSERT (inner keypad) 67h
0F SI PAGE UP (inner keypad) 6Fh
10 DLE PAGE DOWN (inner keypad) 6Dh
11 DC1 HOME (inner keypad) 6Eh
12 DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad) 61h
13 DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 60h
14 DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad) 63h
15 NAK F6 2Fh
16 SYN F1 07h
17 ETB F2 0Fh
18 CAN F3 17h
19 EM F4 1Fh
1A SUB F5 27h
1B ESC ESC 08h
1C FS F7 37h
1D GS F8 3Fh
1E RS F9 47h
1F US F10 4Fh

Product Reference Guide 413

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table F-5. Scanset 3 122-Key Function Key Map

ASCII (hex) ASCII code Key Scancode


00 NUL ALT Right Make 39h
01 SOH ALT Right Break F0h 39h
02 STX ALT left Make 19h
03 ETX ALT left Break F0h 19h
04 EOT CTRL left (RESET) Make only 11h
05 ENQ CTRL left (RESET) Make/Break 11h F0h 11h
06 ACK ONLINE Enter Make only 58h
07 BEL ONLINE Enter Make/Break 58h F0h 58h
08 BS BS 66h
09 HT TAB right 0Dh
0A LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 6Ah
0B VT TAB left 0Dh + S
0C FF CR (FIELD EXIT) Make only 5Ah F0h 5Ah
0D CR CR (FIELD EXIT) Make/Break 5Ah
0E SO INSERT (inner keypad) 65h
0F SI FIELD + 79h
10 DLE FIELD - 7Ch
11 DC1 HOME (inner keypad) 62h
12 DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad) 61h
13 DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 60h
14 DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad) 63h
15 NAK F6 2Fh
16 SYN F1 07h
17 ETB F2 0Fh
18 CAN F3 17h
19 EM F4 1Fh
1A SUB F5 27h
1B ESC ESC 08h
1C FS F7 37h
1D GS F8 3Fh
1E RS F9 47h
1F US F10 4Fh

414 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Table F-6. Japanese DOS Function Key Map

ASCII value ASCII code Key Scancode


00h NUL ALT right Make 31h
01h SOH ALT right Break B1h
02h STX ALT left Make 31h
03h ETX ALT left Break B1h
04h EOT CTRL left Make 41h
05h ENQ CTRL left Break C1h
06h ACK CTRL right Make 41h
07h BEL CTRL right Break C1h
08h BS BS 3Eh
09h HT TAB right 3Ch
0Ah LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 4Dh
0Bh VT TAB left 3Ch + S
0Ch FF Enter (right keypad) 60h
0Dh CR CR 3Bh
0Eh SO INSERT (inner keypad) 52h
0Fh SI PAGE UP (inner keypad) 49h
10h DLE PAGE DOWN (inner keypad) 51h
11h DC1 HOME (inner keypad) 4Ch
12h DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad) 4Bh
13h DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 4Ah
14h DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad) 4Eh
15h NAK F6 6Dh
16h SYN F1 68h
17h ETB F2 69h
18h CAN F3 6Ah
19h EM F4 6Bh
1Ah SUB F5 6Ch
1Bh ESC ESC 3Dh
1Ch FS F7 6Eh
1Dh GS F8 6Fh
1Eh RS F9 70h
1Fh US F10 71h

Product Reference Guide 415

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table F-7. NEC 9801-Key Function Key Map

ASCII value ASCII code Key Scancode


00h NUL unused n/a
01h SOH CR 1Ch
02h STX CAPS LOCK ON (make) 71h
03h ETX CAPS LOCK OFF (break) F1h
04h EOT CTRL left Make 74h
05h ENQ CTRL left Break F4h
06h ACK CTRL-C 60h
07h BEL n/a n/a
08h BS BS 0Eh
09h HT TAB right 0Fh
0Ah LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 3Ch
0Bh VT TAB left 0Fh + S
0Ch FF DELETE 39h
0Dh CR CR 1Ch
0Eh SO INSERT (inner keypad) 38h
0Fh SI KATAKANA LOCK ON (Make) 72h
10h DLE KATAKANA LOCK OFF (Break) F2h
11h DC1 HOME (inner keypad) 3Eh
12h DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad) 3Bh
13h DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 3Dh
14h DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad) 3Ah
15h NAK F6 67h
16h SYN F1 62h
17h ETB F2 63h
18h CAN F3 64h
19h EM F4 65h
1Ah SUB F5 66h
1Bh ESC ESC 00h
1Ch FS F7 68h
1Dh GS F8 69h
1Eh RS F9 6Ah
1Fh US F10 6Bh

416 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Table F-8. USB Keyboard Function Key Usage Map

ASCII Key Value Usage Name


00 NUL ALT right Make
01 SOH ALT right Break
02 STX F11
03 ETX F12
04 EOT GUI right Make
05 ENQ GUI right Break
06 ACK CTRL right Make
07 BEL CTRL right Break
08 BS BS
09 HT TAB right
0A LF RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
0B VT TAB left
0C FF Enter (right keypad)
0D CR CR
0E SO INSERT (inner keypad)
0F SI PAGE UP (inner keypad)
10 DLE PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)
11 DC1 HOME (inner keypad)
12 DC2 LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
13 DC3 DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
14 DC4 UP arrow (inner keypad)
15 NAK F6
16 SYN F1
17 ETB F2
18 CAN F3
19 EM F4
1A SUB F5
1B ESC ESC
1C FS F7
1D GS F8
1E RS F9
1F US F10

Product Reference Guide 417

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTES

418 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Keyboard Model Cross Reference

NOTES

Product Reference Guide 419

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTES

420 Magellan® 2200VS/2200VS and 2300HS/2300HS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ASCII Character Set
The table on this page shows a set of ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values.
The Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology specific label identifiers, as
well as enabling custom prefix and suffix characters.

ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Hex


Hex No. Hex No. Hex No.
Char. Char. Char. Char. No.

NUL 00 SP 20 @ 40 ‘ 60
SOH 01 ! 21 A 41 a 61
STX 02 “ 22 B 42 b 62
ETX 03 # 23 C 43 c 63
EOT 04 $ 24 D 44 d 64
ENQ 05 % 25 E 45 e 65
ACK 06 & 26 F 46 f 66
BEL 07 ’ 27 G 47 g 67
BS 08 ( 28 H 48 h 68
HT 09 ) 29 I 49 i 69
LF 0A * 2A J 4A j 6A
VT 0B + 2B K 4B k 6B
FF 0C , 2C L 4C l 6C
CR 0D - 2D M 4D m 6D
SO 0E . 2E N 4E n 6E
SI 0F / 2F O 4F o 6F
DLE 10 0 30 P 50 p 70
DC1 11 1 31 Q 51 q 71
DC2 12 2 32 R 52 r 72
DC3 13 3 33 S 53 s 73
DC4 14 4 34 T 54 t 74
NAK 15 5 35 U 55 u 75
SYN 16 6 36 V 56 v 76
ETB 17 7 37 W 57 w 77
CAN 18 8 38 X 58 x 78
EM 19 9 39 Y 59 y 79
SUB 1A : 3A Z 5A z 7A
ESC 1B ; 3B [ 5B { 7B
FS 1C < 3C \ 5C | 7C
GS 1D = 3D ] 5D } 7D
RS 1E > 3E ^ 5E ~ 7E
US 1F ? 3F _ 5F DEL 7F

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Australia Japan
Datalogic Scanning Pty Ltd Datalogic Scanning KK
Telephone: [61] (2) 9870 3200 Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761
australia.scanning@datalogic.com japan.scanning@datalogic.com

France and Benelux Latin America


Datalogic Scanning SAS Datalogic Scanning, Inc
Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00 Telephone: (305) 591-3222
france.scanning@datalogic.com latinamerica.scanning@datalogic.com

Germany Singapore
Datalogic Scanning GmbH Datalogic Scanning Singapore PTE LTD
Telephone: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58-0 Telephone: (65) 6435-1311
germany.scanning@datalogic.com singapore.scanning@datalogic.com

India Iberia
Datalogic Scanning India Datalogic Scanning SAS Sucursal en España
Telephone: 91- 22 - 64504739 Telephone: 34 91 746 28 60
india.scanning@datalogic.com spain.scanning@datalogic.com

Italy United Kingdom


Datalogic Scanning SpA Datalogic Scanning LTD
Telephone: [39] (0) 39/62903.1 Telephone: 44 (0) 1582 464900
italy.scanning@datalogic.com uk.scanning@datalogic.com

www.scanning.datalogic.com
Datalogic Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140

©2008 - 2009 Datalogic Scanning, Inc. R44-2979 (Rev. A) 11/09

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like